Using the Operator Panel
User’s Guide
NPD4756-01 EN
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Contents
Preface
Copyright and Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illegal Copies and Printouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Product Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1 Specifications
Copy Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Print Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Scan Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fax Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Direct Fax Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ADF Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Main Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Printing the Panel Settings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
The Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
The Printer Setting Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Saver Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Exiting the Power Saver Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Contents
2
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Printer Management Software
Print and Scan Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
EpsonNet Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Creating an Administrative Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Status Monitor (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Launcher (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Address Book Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Express Scan Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Chapter 4 Printer Connection and Software Installation
Overview of Network Setup and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting Printer to a Computer or a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TCP/IP and IP Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Automatically Setting the Printer’s IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dynamic Methods of Setting the Printer’s IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Verifying the IP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Printing and Checking the System Settings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Using the PCL print driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using Epson Universal P6 Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Configuring Wireless Settings on the Operator Panel (AL-MX200DWF only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux (CUPS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installing Print Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Specifying the Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Specifying the Default Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Specifying Printing Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Uninstalling Print Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 5 Printing Basics
About Print Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contents
3
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Print Media Usage Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Print Media That Can Damage Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Print Media Storage Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Supported Print Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Usable Print Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Loading Print Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Print Media Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Using the Output Tray Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Setting Paper Sizes and Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setting Paper Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setting Paper Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Printing from the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Canceling a Print Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Duplex Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Direct Printing Using a USB Storage Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Selecting Printing Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Printing Custom Size Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Checking Status of a Print Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Printing a Report Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Printer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Printing with the Web Services on Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding Roles of Print Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Printer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Chapter 6 Copying
Loading Paper for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Preparing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Making Copies From the Document Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Customizing Copy Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Number of Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Original Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Output Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Contents
4
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Reduce/Enlarge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Collated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Document Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Lighten/Darken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Auto Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2-Sided. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Multiple Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Margin Top/Bottom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Margin Left/Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Margin Middle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Copying an ID Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Changing the Default Copy Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Chapter 7 Scanning
Scanning Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Scanning to a USB Connected Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using the TWAIN Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Using the WIA Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Using a Scanner on the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Confirming the Login name and the Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Configuring the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Sending the Scanned File to the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Scanning to a USB Storage Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Adding an Entry to the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configuring an SMTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Customizing Scan Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Changing the Default Scan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Changing the Scan Settings for an Individual Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Contents
5
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Faxing
Connecting the Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuring Fax Initial Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Setting Your Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Setting the Printer ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Setting the Time and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Changing the Clock Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Sending a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Document Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Lighten/Darken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Inserting a Pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sending a Fax from Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sending a Fax Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Confirming Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Automatic Redialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Sending a Delayed Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Sending a Fax Using the Driver (Direct Fax). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Sending a Fax from Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Sending a Fax from Mac OS X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Receiving a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
About Receiving Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Receiving Faxes in the Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Polling Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Automatic Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Speed Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing Using the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing Using a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Group Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating Group Dial Numbers Using the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Contents
6
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Editing Group Dial Numbers Using the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Creating and Editing a Fax Group Using a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Printing the Address Book List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Other Ways to Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Using the Secure Receiving Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Using an Answering Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Using a Computer Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Setting Sounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Speaker Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Ringer Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Specifying the Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Customizing Fax Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Available Fax Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Changing the Default Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Printing a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Chapter 9 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
Understanding the Operator Panel Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Report / List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Meter Readings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Admin Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Defaults Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Tray Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Panel Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Panel Lock Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Enabling the Panel Lock Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Disabling the Panel Lock Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Limiting Access to Copy, Fax, Scan, and USB Direct Print Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Resetting to Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Changing the Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Using the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Using the Printer Setting Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Using the Numeric Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Entering Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Changing Numbers or Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Contents
7
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Avoiding Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Clearing Paper Jams From the Center Output Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Jam Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Basic Printer Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Display Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Printing Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Print Quality Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
The Output Is Too Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Toner Smears or Print Comes Off/Stain on Back Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Random Spots/Blurred Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
The Entire Output Is Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Streaks Appear on the Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Mottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Ghosting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Fog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Auger Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Wrinkled/Stained Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
The Top Margin Is Incorrect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Protrudent/Bumpy Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Copy Problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Copy Quality Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Fax Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Scanning Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Scan Driver/Printer Utility Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Other Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Understanding Printer Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Contacting Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Getting Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
LCD Panel Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Status Monitor Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Enabling the Non Genuine Toner Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Using the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Contents
8
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Using the Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Chapter 11 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Cleaning the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Replacing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
When to Replace the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Removing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Installing a Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Ordering Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
When to Order a Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Recycling Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Storing Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Managing the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Checking or Managing the Printer with EpsonNet Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Checking Printer Status with Status Monitor (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Checking Printer Status Through E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Conserving Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Checking Page Counts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Moving the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Appendix A Where To Get Help
Contacting Epson Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Before Contacting Epson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Help for Users in Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Help for Users in Taiwan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Help for Users in Singapore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Help for Users in Thailand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Help for Users in Vietnam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Help for Users in Indonesia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Help for Users in Hong Kong. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Help for Users in Malaysia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Help for Users in the Philippines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Contents
9
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Index
Contents
10
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Preface
Copyright and Trademarks
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form
or by any means, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained
herein. Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this
product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties
as a result of: accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or
alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson
Corporation’s operating and maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation and its affiliates shall not be liable against any damages or problems arising
from the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original
Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
®
®
®
®
®
Apple , Bonjour , ColorSync , Macintosh , and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows Vista , Windows , and Windows Server are trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2012 Seiko Epson Corporation. All rights reserved.
Preface
11
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Using This Guide
Conventions
1. In this guide, personal computers and workstations are collectively called “computers”.
2. The following terms are used throughout this guide:
Important:
Important information that must be read and followed.
Note:
Additional information that merits emphasis.
See Also:
References within this guide.
3. Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
,
,
, Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading the document or paper in the landscape orientation.
, Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading the document or paper in the portrait orientation.
LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
* Paper feed direction
4. The screen shots and illustrations in this guide are those of the AL-MX200DWF unless otherwise
specified. Some of the items in the screen shots and illustrations may not be displayed or available
depending on your printer model.
5. Some features are not available on some models.
Preface
12
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Illegal Copies and Printouts
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or
imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be
illegal to copy or print in your country.
❏ Currency
❏ Banknotes and checks
❏ Bank and government bonds and securities
❏ Passports and identification cards
❏ Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner
❏ Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments
This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of
doubt, contact your legal counsel.
Product Features
Features
This section describes the product features and indicates their links.
Preface
13
AL-MX200 Series
Duplex Print
User’s Guide
Multiple Up Print
When you have multiple pages to print, you can With the Multiple Up print feature of the
use the duplex feature of the computer to print printer, you can print multiple pages on a single
sheet of paper to save paper consumption.
on either side of paper to save paper
consumption.
For more information, see the print driver's
For more information, see “Duplex Printing” on help.
page 141.
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Wireless Print (AL-MX200DWF only)
Print media loaded in the PSI is given
precedence over the media in the paper tray.
Using the PSI, you can print on print media of
another type or size preferentially over the
regular media in the paper tray.
With the wireless LAN feature of the printer,
you can place your printer at any location and
print from a computer without cabling.
For more information, see “Loading Print
Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on
page 132.
For more information, see “Configuring
Wireless Network Settings (AL-MX200DWF
only)” on page 54.
Preface
14
AL-MX200 Series
USB Direct Print
You can print directly from your USB storage
device without starting your computer and an
application.
For more information, see “Direct Printing
Using a USB Storage Device” on page 146.
ID Card Copy
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one
side of a single sheet of paper in its original size
by selecting ID Card Copy on the operator
panel.
For more information, see “Copying an ID
Card” on page 181.
User’s Guide
2-in-1 Copy
You can copy two original pages on one side of a
single sheet of paper to save paper consumption.
For more information, see “Multiple Up” on
page 176.
Scan to E-Mail
You can directly send scanned data as an e-mail
attachment. You can choose destination e-mail
addresses from the Address Book or enter
addresses directly using the numeric keypad.
For more information, see “Sending an E-Mail
With the Scanned Image” on page 212.
Preface
15
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Scan to SMB/FTP (Network)
Scan to USB Storage Device
You can transfer scanned data to a computer or
a server via SMB or FTP without service
software. Although prior registration of the
destination FTP server or the computer on the
Address Book is required, it helps save your
time.
You do not need a computer to connect your
USB storage device to save scanned data. Insert
your USB storage device into the front USB port
on the printer, and save scanned data directly to
your USB storage device.
For more information, see “Using a Scanner on
the Network” on page 187.
Scan from Document Glass
For more information, see “Scanning to a USB
Storage Device” on page 211.
Scan from ADF
You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the
You can scan pages of a book or a brochure from
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). When you
the document glass. When you scan documents
scan documents using the ADF, load them face
using the document glass, place them face down.
up.
For more information, see “Making Copies
From the Document Glass” on page 163.
For more information, see “Making Copies
From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)”
on page 165.
Preface
16
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Direct Fax from Computer
Address Book
You can directly send faxes from your computer
using the fax driver. You can select a recipient
from the Phone Book (PC Fax Address Book) or
Address Book (Device Address Book), or enter a
name and fax number directly using the
numeric keypad.
The Address Book simplifies the recipient
specification. You can use the Address Book on
the printer as well as on the server. Select the
desired address or fax number from the Address
Book when using the Scan to E-Mail or Scan to
Network feature, or sending faxes.
For more information, see “Sending a Fax Using For more information, see “Address Book
Editor” on page 37.
the Driver (Direct Fax)” on page 233.
Preface
17
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 1
Specifications
Copy Function
Items
Description
Type
Desktop
Memory
256 MB
HDD
—
Scanning Resolution
Document glass: 600 × 600 dpi
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF): 600 × 300 dpi
Printing Resolution
Standard: 600 × 600 dpi
High Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi*
* When printing in high resolution mode, printing speed may be reduced due
to image quality adjustment. Printing speed may also be reduced depending
on documents.
Halftone
256 grayscale gradation
Original Paper Size
Document glass:
The maximum size is 215.9 × 297 mm for both sheets and books.
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF):
The maximum size is 215.9 × 355.6 mm.
Output Paper Size
Paper tray:
Maximum: Legal
Minimum: 76.2 × 127 mm (3 × 5")
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI):
Maximum: Legal
Minimum: A5
Image loss width: Top edge, 4 mm or less; bottom edge, 4 mm or less; left and
right edges, 4 mm or less
Specifications
18
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Output Paper Weight
Paper tray:
User’s Guide
60 – 163 gsm (for postcard 60 – 190 gsm is available)
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI):
60 – 163 gsm
Important:
Use paper recommended by Epson. Copying may not be performed correctly
depending on the conditions. For more information, see “Print Media That Can
Damage Your Printer” on page 117.
/standard mode)
First Copy Output Time
20 seconds (for A4
Reduction/Enlargement
Size-for-Size: 1:1 ± 1.3%
Preset %: 1:0.50, 1:0.70, 1:0.81, 1:1.00, 1:1.22, 1:1.41, 1:2.00
Variable %: 1:0.25 - 1:4.00 (1% increments)
Continuous Copy Speed
Document glass:
A4: 30 sheets/minute (Measured by making 11 copies of a single page
document.)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF):
A4: 20 sheets/minute (Measured by making a single copy of an 11- page
document.)
Important:
Paper Tray Capacity
❏
The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.
❏
The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.
Standard:
250 sheets (Paper tray) + 10 sheets (PSI)
Maximum paper capacity:
260 sheets (standard)
Continuous Copy
99 images
Note:
The machine may pause temporarily to perform image stabilization.
Output Tray Capacity
Center output tray:
)
Approximately 125 sheets (A4
Document output tray:
Approximately 50 sheets (A4
Power Supply
)
AC 220 – 240 V ± 10%/110 – 127 V ± 10%, 5.2/9.8A for both 50/60 Hz ± 3Hz
Specifications
19
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Power Consumption
Sleep mode: 4 W or less
User’s Guide
Low Power mode: 8 W or less
Standby mode: 55 W or less
Dimensions
Width 420 × Depth 398* × Height 365 mm
* Measured when the paper tray is inserted but not extended.
Machine Weight
12.0 kg
Important:
Space Requirement
❏
The weight of paper is not included.
❏
The weight of the toner cartridge is included.
Width 795.5 × Depth 1049* mm
* Measured when the front cover and the rear cover are open.
Usage Environment
Temperature: 10 - 32 ˚C; Humidity: 10 - 85% (except malfunctions due to dew
condensation)
Non-Use: Temperature: -20 - 40 ˚C; Humidity: 5 - 85% (except malfunctions due
to dew condensation)
Important:
Until the conditions (temperature and humidity) inside the printer become
acclimated to the installation environment, certain qualities of the paper can
cause poor printing.
Print Function
Items
Description
Type
Built-in
Continuous Print Speed*1
A4
: When plain paper is fed from the paper tray
1 Sided*2: 30 sheets/min
Important:
*1 Print speed may decrease due to factors such as paper type, paper size, and
printing conditions.
*2 When continuously printing a single document of A4
.
Specifications
20
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Print Resolution
Standard: 600 × 600 dpi
User’s Guide
High Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi*
* When printing in high resolution mode, printing speed may be reduced due
to image quality adjustment. Printing speed may also be reduced depending
on documents.
® 5e, PCL® 6, PostScript Level3 Compatible, PDF (Ver. 1.6), TIFF,
PDL
Standard: PCL
JPEG
Protocol
AL-MX200DNF:
Ethernet (standard): TCP/IP (LPD, Port9100, WSD)
AL-MX200DWF:
Ethernet (standard): TCP/IP (LPD, Port9100, WSD)
IEEE802.11b/g (standard)
Note:
Operating System*1
❏
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
❏
WSD is available only on Microsoft
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
® Windows Vista® or Windows® 7.
Microsoft Windows XP,
Microsoft Windows XP x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Vista ,
Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows 7,
Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Edition,
Mac OS *2,
Linux OS*3
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
Important:
*1 For the latest information about the supported operating systems, contact
our Customer Support Center or your dealer.
*2 Mac OS
® X 10.5.8 - 10.6, 10.7 are supported.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5/6 Desktop (x86), SUSE Linux Enterprise
®
®
Desktop 10/11 (x86), and Ubuntu 8/10 (x86) are supported.
*3
Specifications
21
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Connectivity
AL-MX200DNF:
User’s Guide
Standard: Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0
AL-MX200DWF:
Standard: Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0, IEEE802.11b/g
Scan Function
Items
Description
Type
Color scanner
Original Paper Size
Same as the Copy Function
Scanning Resolution
1200 × 1200 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi
Scanning Halftone
Monochrome:
1 bit for the line-art image, 8 bit for the gray-scale image
Color:
24 bit
Connectivity
AL-MX200DNF:
Standard: Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0
AL-MX200DWF:
Standard: Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0, IEEE802.11b/g
Specifications
22
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Scan to PC
Protocol: TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)
User’s Guide
Operating System:
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
Microsoft Windows Vista ,
Microsoft Windows 7,
Microsoft Windows XP x64,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64,
Microsoft Windows Vista x64,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64,
Microsoft Windows 7 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5.8 - 10.6, 10.7
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
Important:
For the latest information about the supported operating systems, refer to the
Epson Web Site.
File Format: PDF (multi page 1 file) / JPEG / TIFF (1 page 1 file)
Scan to e-mail
Protocol: TCP/IP (SMTP, POP3)
File Format: TIFF (1 page 1 file) / JPEG / PDF (multi page 1 file)
Fax Function
Items
Description
Send Document Size
Document glass:
Maximum: 215.9 × 297 mm
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF):
Maximum: 215.9 × 355.6 mm
Recording Paper Size
Maximum: Legal
Minimum: A5
Specifications
23
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Transmission Time
3 seconds (V.34)
User’s Guide
Important:
When transmitting an A4 size 700-character document in the standard quality
(8 × 3.85 lines/mm) and high speed mode (28.8 kbps or above: JBIG). This is only
the transmission speed for image information and does not include the
controlling time for the communication. Note that the actual transmission time
depends on the content of documents, the machine that the recipient uses,
and the status of the communication line.
Transmission Mode
ITU-T Super G3, ITU-T G3 ECM, ITU-T G3
Scanning Resolution
400 × 400 pixel/25.4 mm (R16 × 15.4 line/mm)
300 × 300 pixel/25.4 mm (R8 × 15.4 line/mm)
200 × 200 pixel/25.4 mm (R8 × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 100 pixel/25.4 mm (R8 × 3.85 line/mm)
Coding Method
Monochrome: 1 bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding
Color: Not supported.
Transmission Speed
V.34 (33.6 /31.2 /28.8 /26.4 /24 /21.6 /19.2 /16.8 /14.4 /12 /9.6 /7.2 /4.8 /2.4kbps)
V.17 (14.4 /12 /9.6 /7.2kbps)
V.29 (9.6 /7.2kbps)
V.27ter (4.8 /2.4kbps)
No. of Fax Lines
RJ-11, 1 line
PSTN, PBX. Leased line (3.4KHz/2-wire)
Direct Fax Function
Items
Description
Document Size
A4, Letter, Folio, Legal
Transmission Speed
Same as the Fax function
Transmission Resolution
Same as the Fax function
Applicable Lines
Same as the Fax function
Specifications
24
AL-MX200 Series
Items
Description
Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP,
Microsoft Windows Vista ,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
Microsoft Windows 7,
Microsoft Windows XP x64,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64,
Microsoft Windows Vista x64,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64,
Microsoft Windows 7 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5.8 - 10.6, 10.7
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
User’s Guide
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
Important:
For the latest information about the supported operating systems, refer to the
Epson Web Site.
ADF Function
Items
Description
Type
Simplex
Life
80,000 images
Specifications
25
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 2
Basic Operation
Main Components
This section provides an overview of your printer.
Front View
1
Output Tray Extension
2
Center Output Tray
3
Front USB Port
4
Operator Panel
5
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
6
Document Feeder Tray
7
Document Output Tray
8
Document Stopper
9
Power Switch
10
Toner Cartridge
11
Paper Tray Cover
12
Paper Tray
13
Front Cover
14
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
15
Paper Width Guides
16
Toner Access Cover
Basic Operation
26
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Rear View
1
Registration Roller
2
OPC Drum
3
Levers
4
ADF Cover
5
Ethernet Port
6
USB Port
7
Paper Chute
8
Transfer Roller
9
Power Connector
10
Rear Cover Handle
11
Rear Cover
12
Phone Connector
13
Wall Jack Connector
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Basic Operation
27
AL-MX200 Series
1
ADF Cover
2
Document Guides
3
ADF Glass
4
Document Glass
5
Document Cover
6
Document Feeder Tray
User’s Guide
Operator Panel
The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD), light-emitting diodes
(LED), control buttons, one-touch buttons, and numeric keypad, which allow you to control the
printer.
1
One-touch buttons
Calls up the stored fax number registered in the Phone Book. The
first eight fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the
buttons in row order, starting from the top left corner.
2
(Copy) button/LED
Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.
3
(Scan) button/LED
Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.
4
buttons
Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.
5
buttons
Moves a cursor or highlight left or right.
6
Job Status button/LED
Moves to the top level of the Job Status menu.
7
System button/LED
Moves to the top level of the System menu.
8
Numeric keypad
Enters characters and numbers.
Basic Operation
28
AL-MX200 Series
9
Redial/Pause button
User’s Guide
Re-dials a telephone number.
Inserts a pause during dialing.
10
Speed Dial button
Calls up a stored telephone number.
11
(Clear All) button
Resets the current setting, and returns to the top level of each
service menu.
12
(Energy Saver) button/LED
Lights up in the Sleep mode. Press this button to exit the Sleep
mode.
13
(Print) button/LED
Moves to the top level of the Print menu.
14
(Fax) button/LED
Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.
15
LCD Panel
Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
16
(Back) button
Returns to the previous screen.
17
button
Confirms the entry of values.
18
Address Book button
Pressing this button at the Fax menu moves to the top level of the
Phone Book menu.
19
# button
Enters characters “(space) & ( )”.
20
C (Clear) button
Deletes characters and numbers.
21
Data LED
Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending jobs.
22
Error LED
Lights up when the printer has an error.
23
(Start) button
Starts a job.
24
(Stop) button
Cancels the current processing or pending job.
Note:
❏ Selecting a different menu or returning to the previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Be
sure to press the button to save the current entry or setting.
❏ For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see “Using the
Numeric Keypad” on page 327.
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language and the clock date and time when you turn on the printer for the
first time.
Basic Operation
29
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
When you turn on the printer, a wizard appears on the LCD panel. Follow the steps below to configure
the initial settings.
Note:
If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Select Function appears on the LCD panel in three
minutes. After that, you can configure the following initial settings by selecting Power On Wizard on
the operator panel as needed.
For details on the operator panel, see “Understanding the Operator Panel Menus” on page 264.
1. Select the language you want to use on the operator panel, and then press the
2. Press the
button to start setting the region.
3. Select your region, and then press the
button.
4. Select the appropriate time zone, and then press the
5. Specify the current date, and then press the
button.
6. Specify the current time, and then press the
button.
7. Press the
button.
button for fax setup.
If you want to skip the fax setup, press the
8. Enter your fax number, and then press the
9. Enter a name, and then press the
10. Press the
button.
(Start) button.
button.
button.
button to complete the initial settings on the operator panel.
Printing the Panel Settings Page
The Panel Settings page shows current settings on the operator panel menus.
The Operator Panel
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
Basic Operation
30
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Report / List, and then press the
3. Select Panel Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
The Panel Settings page is printed.
The Printer Setting Utility
®
®
The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
2. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3. Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page is displayed.
4. Click the Panel Settings button.
The Panel Settings page is printed.
Power Saver Mode
The printer has a power saving feature that reduces power consumption during periods of inactivity
and operates in two modes: Low Power and Sleep. In Low Power mode, only the LCD panel goes blank.
In Sleep mode, all LEDs, except for the (Energy Saver) LED, on the operator panel go out and the
LCD panel goes blank. When the printer is in Sleep mode, it consumes less power than in Low Power
mode.
Basic Operation
31
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
By default, the printer enters Low Power mode in one minute of inactivity after completion of the last
job, and then enters Sleep mode in another 6 minutes of inactivity. You can change these default
settings in the following ranges:
Low Power mode: 1 to 45 minutes
Sleep mode: 6 to 11 minutes
See Also:
“Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings” on page 324
Exiting the Power Saver Mode
The printer automatically exits the power saver mode when it receives a print job from a computer or
fax data through the telephone line. Alternatively, you can manually bring it back into standby mode.
Press any button on the operator panel in Low Power mode. In Sleep mode, press the (Energy
Saver) button. Whether the printer is in Low Power or Sleep mode, it will take about 25 seconds for
the printer to resume standby mode.
Note:
❏ In Low Power mode, opening and closing the rear cover will bring the printer back into standby
mode.
❏ When the printer is in Sleep mode, all buttons on the operator panel except for the (Energy Saver)
button do not function. To use the buttons on the operator panel, press the (Energy Saver) button
to exit the power saver mode.
See Also:
“Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings” on page 324
Basic Operation
32
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 3
Printer Management Software
Print and Scan Drivers
To access all of your printer’s features, install print and scan drivers from the Software Disc.
❏ A printer driver enables communications between your computer and printer and provides access
to your printer features.
❏ The scan driver enables you to scan images directly to your personal computer and place scanned
images directly into an application via USB or the network.
®
®
The scan driver is installed along with your print driver. It is available for Microsoft Windows and
Mac OS X.
®
See Also:
❏ “Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows” on page 49
❏ “Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X” on page 99
❏ “Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux (CUPS)” on page 104
EpsonNet Config
This section provides information on EpsonNet Config.
EpsonNet Config is a hyper text transfer protocol (HTTP)-based web page service that is accessed
through your web browser.
Using EpsonNet Config, you can confirm the printer status, and change the printer configuration
options easily. Anyone on your network can access the printer using EpsonNet Config. In
administrative mode, you can change the configuration of the printer, set up your fax directories, and
manage your printer settings without leaving your computer.
Note:
❏ Users who are not given passwords by the administrator can still view the configuration settings in
user mode. They will not be able to save or apply any changes to the current configuration and
settings.
Printer Management Software
33
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ For details on the menu items of EpsonNet Config, refer to the Help on EpsonNet Config.
Creating an Administrative Password
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
3. Click the Properties tab.
4. In the left navigation panel, scroll down to Security and select Administrator Settings.
5. Select Enabled for Administrator Mode.
6. In the Administrator Login ID field, enter a name for the administrator.
Note:
The default ID and password are both blank.
7. In the Administrator Password and Re-enter Password fields, enter a password for the
administrator.
8. In the Maximum Login Attempts field, enter the number of login attempts allowed.
9. Click Apply.
Your new password has been set and anyone with the administrator name and password can log in
and change the printer configuration and settings.
Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only)
The Printer Setting Utility allows you to view or specify the system settings. You can also diagnose the
system settings with the Printer Setting Utility.
The Printer Setting Utility consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance, and
Diagnosis tabs.
The Printer Setting Utility is installed along with print drivers.
Printer Management Software
34
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
The Password dialog box appears the first time you attempt to change settings on Printer Setting Utility
when the Panel Lock feature is enabled on the printer. In this case, enter the password you specified, and
click OK to apply the settings.
Status Monitor (Windows Only)
You can check the printer status with Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor printer icon on
the taskbar at the bottom right of the screen. The Printer Selection window appears, which displays
the printer name, printer connection port, printer status, and model name. Check the column Status
to know the current status of your printer.
Settings button: Displays the Settings window and allows you to modify the Status Monitor settings.
Click the name of the desired printer listed on the Printer Selection window. The Printer Status
window appears.
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example,
when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low.
By default, the Printer Status window appears automatically when an error occurs. You can specify
the conditions for starting the Printer Status window in Printer Status Window Properties.
To change the pop-up settings for the Printer Status window:
1. Right-click the Status Monitor printer icon on the taskbar at the bottom right of the screen.
2. Select Printer Status Window Properties.
The Printer Status Window Properties window appears.
3. Select the type of the pop-up and then click OK.
You can also check the toner level of your printer (when a genuine toner cartridge is installed) and the
job information on the Printer Status window.
Status Monitor is installed along with print drivers.
Printer Management Software
35
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Launcher (Windows Only)
Using the Launcher-Btype window, you can open the Status Window, Printer Setting Utility,
Address Book Editor, and Express Scan Manager.
To use the Launcher, select to install the Launcher when you install print drivers.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
To start the Launcher:
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Launcher.
The Launcher-Btype window appears.
2. The Launcher-Btype window provides several buttons: Status Window, Printer Setting
Utility, Address Book Editor, and Express Scan Manager.
To exit, click the X button at the top-right of the window.
For more information, click the Help button/icon of each application.
Status Window
Opens the Printer Status window.
See Also:
“Status Monitor (Windows Only)” on page 35
Printer Management Software
36
AL-MX200 Series
Printer Setting Utility
User’s Guide
Starts the Printer Setting Utility.
See Also:
“Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only)” on page 34
Address Book Editor
Starts the Address Book Editor, which allows you to add and edit Address Book
entries.
See Also:
“Address Book Editor” on page 37
Express Scan Manager
Starts the Express Scan Manager.
See Also:
“Express Scan Manager” on page 37
Address Book Editor
The Address Book Editor provides a convenient interface for modifying the printer’s Address Book
entries. With it you can add:
❏ Fax entries
❏ E-Mail entries
❏ Server entries
When you start the software, the Address Book Editor reads the printer’s Address Book. You can add,
edit, and delete entries. After making changes, you can then save the updated Address Book to the
printer or to your computer.
The Address Book Editor is installed along with your print driver. It is available for Windows and
Mac OS X.
Express Scan Manager
The Express Scan Manager handles scan jobs sent from the printer to your computer via USB. When
scan jobs are sent from the printer to the computer, the Express Scan Manager automatically manages
the scan jobs.
Before scanning to your computer, start the Express Scan Manager and specify the location to send
scanned image files.
Printer Management Software
37
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Click Open the image file to display scanned files saved in the specified destination after scanning.
The Express Scan Manager is installed along with your print driver. It is available for Windows and
Mac OS X.
Note:
When you separately install the Express Scan Manager from the Software Disc, you also need to install
the scan driver from the Software Disc.
See Also:
“Using the Operator Panel” on page 183
Printer Management Software
38
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 4
Printer Connection and Software Installation
Overview of Network Setup and Configuration
To set up and configure the network:
1. Connect the printer to the network using the recommended hardware and cables.
2. Turn on the printer and the computer.
3. Print the System Settings page and keep it for referencing network settings.
4. Install the driver software on the computer from the Software Disc. For information on driver
installation, see the section in this chapter for the specific operating system you are using.
5. Configure the printer’s TCP/IP address, which is required to identify the printer on the network.
❏ Microsoft Windows operating systems: Run the installer on the Software Disc to
automatically set the printer’s Internet Protocol (IP) address if you connect the printer to an
established TCP/IP network. You can also manually set the printer’s IP address on the
operator panel.
®
®
❏ Mac OS X and Linux systems: Manually set the printer’s TCP/IP address on the operator
panel. To use a wireless connection (AL-MX200DWF only), also configure wireless network
settings on the operator panel.
®
®
6. Print the System Settings page to verify the new settings.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
See Also:
“Printing the System Settings Page” on page 156
Connecting Your Printer
The interface cables of your printer must meet the following requirements:
Printer Connection and Software Installation
39
AL-MX200 Series
Connection Type
Connection Specifications
Ethernet
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible
USB
USB 2.0 compatible
Wireless (AL-MX200DWF only)
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g
Wall Jack Connector
RJ11
Phone Connector
RJ11WAll
1
Ethernet Port
2
USB Port
3
Wall Jack Connector
4
Phone Connector
User’s Guide
Connecting Printer to a Computer or a Network
Connect your printer via a USB, Ethernet, or wireless (AL-MX200DWF only) connection. Hardware
and cabling requirements vary for the different connection methods. Ethernet cables and hardware
are not supplied with your printer and must be purchased separately.
The available features for each connection type are shown in the following table.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
40
AL-MX200 Series
Connection Type
Available Features
USB
When connected via USB connection you can:
Ethernet
Wireless (AL-MX200DWF only)
User’s Guide
❏
Instruct print jobs from a computer.
❏
Scan and print an image into an application.
❏
Scan and print an image to a folder on the computer.
❏
Use the Address Book Editor to manage Address Book entries.
When connected via Ethernet connection you can:
❏
Instruct print jobs from a computer on the network.
❏
Scan and print an image to a computer on the network.
❏
Scan and print an image to an FTP server.
❏
Scan to e-mail.
❏
Use EpsonNet Config to manage Address Book entries.
When connected via wireless connection you can:
❏
Instruct print jobs from a computer on the network.
❏
Scan and print an image to a computer on the network.
❏
Scan and print an image to an FTP server.
❏
Scan to e-mail.
❏
Use EpsonNet Config to manage Address Book entries.
USB Connection
If your printer is connected to a network instead of your computer, skip this section and go to
“Network Connection” on page 42.
To connect the printer to a computer:
1. Connect the smaller end of the supplied USB cable to the USB port on the rear of the printer, and
the other end to a USB port on the computer.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
41
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
* USB port
Note:
Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB connector available on the keyboard.
Network Connection
To connect the printer to an Ethernet network:
1. Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have been turned off and all
cables have been disconnected.
2. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the rear of the printer, and the other
end to a LAN drop or hub.
* Ethernet port
Note:
Do not connect the Ethernet cable when you intend to use the wireless network feature of the
AL-MX200DWF model.
See Also:
“Configuring Wireless Network Settings (AL-MX200DWF only)” on page 54
Printer Connection and Software Installation
42
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Setting the IP Address
TCP/IP and IP Addresses
If your computer is on a large network, contact your network administrator for the appropriate TCP/
IP addresses and additional system settings information.
If you are creating your own small Local Area Network or connecting the printer directly to your
computer using Ethernet, follow the procedure for automatically setting the printer’s IP address.
Computers and printers primarily use TCP/IP protocols to communicate over an Ethernet network.
With TCP/IP protocols, each printer and computer must have a unique IP address. It is important that
the addresses are similar, but not the same; only the last digit needs to be different. For example, your
printer can have the address 192.168.1.2 while your computer has the address 192.168.1.3. Another
device can have the address 192.168.1.4.
Many networks have a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. A DHCP server
automatically programs an IP address into every computer and printer on the network that is
configured to use DHCP. A DHCP server is built into most cable and Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
routers. If you use a cable or DSL router, see your router’s documentation for information on IP
addressing.
Automatically Setting the Printer’s IP Address
If the printer is connected to a small established TCP/IP network without a DHCP server, use the
installer on the Software Disc to detect or assign an IP address to your printer. For further instructions,
insert the Software Disc into your computer's CD/DVD drive. After the Installer starts, follow the
prompts for installation.
Note:
For the automatic installer to function, the printer must be connected to an established TCP/IP network.
Dynamic Methods of Setting the Printer’s IP Address
There are two protocols available for dynamically setting the printer’s IP address:
❏ DHCP
❏ DHCP/Auto IP (enabled by default)
Printer Connection and Software Installation
43
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
You can turn on/off either protocol using the operator panel, or use EpsonNet Config to turn on/off
the DHCP protocol.
Note:
You can print a report that includes the printer’s IP address. On the operator panel, press the System
button, select Report / List, press the
button, select System Settings, and then press the
button. The IP address is listed on the System Settings page.
Using the Operator Panel
To turn on/off either the DHCP or the AutoIP protocol:
1. On the operator panel, press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Network, and then press the
4. Select TCP/IP, and then press the
5. Select IPv4, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
6. Select Get IP Address, and then press the
button.
7. Select DHCP/AutoIP or DHCP, and then press the
button.
Using EpsonNet Config
To turn on/off the DHCP protocol:
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
EpsonNet Config appear on your browser.
3. Select Properties.
4. Select TCP/IP from the Protocol Settings folder on the left navigation panel.
5. In the IP Address Mode field, select the DHCP/AutoIP option.
6. Click the Apply button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
44
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)
Note:
❏ When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use EpsonNet Config. To display EpsonNet
Config, use the link local address. To check a link local address, see “Printing and Checking the
System Settings Page” on page 48.
❏ Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system
administrator.
❏ Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may be different. On Class A, for
example, an IP address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For
assignment of IP addresses, contact your system administrator.
You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or the Printer Setting Utility.
Using the Operator Panel
1. Turn on the printer.
Ensure that the LCD panel shows Select Function.
2. On the operator panel, press the System button.
3. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
4. Select Network, and then press the
5. Select TCP/IP, and then press the
6. Select IPv4, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
7. Select Get IP Address, and then press the
8. Select Panel, and then press the
9. Press the
button.
button.
(Back) button, and then ensure that Get IP Address is selected.
10. Select IP Address, and then press the
button.
11. Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.
12. Press the
button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
45
AL-MX200 Series
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and then press the
14. Press the
User’s Guide
button.
(Back) button, and then ensure that IP Address is selected.
15. Select Subnet Mask, and then press the
button.
16. Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.
17. Press the
button.
18. Repeat steps 16 and 17 to set subnet mask, and then press the
19. Press the
button.
(Back) button, and then ensure that Subnet Mask is selected.
20. Select Gateway Address, and then press the
button.
21. Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.
22. Press the
button.
23. Repeat steps 21 and 22 to set gateway address, and then press the
button.
24. Turn off and turn on the printer.
See Also:
“Operator Panel” on page 28
Using the Printer Setting Utility
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
When you use IPv6 mode for network printing, you cannot use the Printer Setting Utility to assign an IP
address.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
46
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3. Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
4. Select Panel from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
5. Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button to take effect.
The IP address is assigned to your printer. To verify the setting, display the web browser on any
computer connected to the network and enter the IP address into the address bar on the browser. If the
IP address is set up correctly, EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the print drivers with installer. When
you use the network installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to DHCP or DHCP/AutoIP on
the operator panel menus, you can set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the
printer selection window.
Verifying the IP Settings
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Print the System Settings page.
2. Look under the IPv4 heading on the System Settings page to ensure that the IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway address are appropriate.
To verify if the printer is active on the network, run the ping command in your computer:
1. Click Start, and select Search programs and files.
2. Enter cmd, and then press the Enter key.
A black window appears.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
47
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Enter ping xx.xx.xx.xx (where xx.xx.xx.xx is the IP address of your printer), and then press the
Enter key.
4. Reply from the IP address denotes printer is active on the network.
See Also:
“Printing and Checking the System Settings Page” on page 48
Printing and Checking the System Settings Page
Print the System Settings page and check your printer's IP address.
Using the Operator Panel
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Report / List, and then press the
3. Select System Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
The System Settings page is printed.
4. Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network (AL-MX200DNF) or Wired
Network/Wireless Network (AL-MX200DWF) on the System Settings page. If the IP address is
0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP address automatically, and then print the System
Settings page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see “Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)” on
page 45.
Using the Printer Setting Utility
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
48
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
2. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3. Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page appears.
4. Click the System Settings button.
The System Settings page is printed.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx, an IP address has not been
assigned.
See Also:
“Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)” on page 45
Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows
You can use three types of print drivers on your printer:
❏ PCL print driver
See “Using the PCL print driver” on page 50.
❏ PCL compatible Universal P6 print driver
See “Using Epson Universal P6 Printer Driver” on page 97.
❏ PostScript Level3 Compatible print driver
See PostScript Level3 Compatible User’s Guide.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
49
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Using the PCL print driver
Identifying Print Driver Pre-install Status (for Network Connection Setup)
Before installing print drivers on your computer, print the System Settings page to check the IP
address of your printer.
Using the Operator Panel
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Report / List, and then press the
3. Select System Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
The System Settings page is printed.
4. Find the IP address under Wired Network (AL-MX200DNF) or Wired Network/Wireless
Network (AL-MX200DWF) on the System Settings page.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP address automatically, and then
print the System Settings page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see “Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)” on
page 45.
Using the Printer Setting Utility
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
50
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
2. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3. Select TCP/IP Settings from the list on the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx, an IP address has not been
assigned. To assign one for your printer, see “Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)” on
page 45.
Disabling the Firewall Before Installing Printer Drivers
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must disable the firewall before
installing print drivers:
❏ Windows 7
❏ Windows Vista
❏
®
Windows Server 2008 R2
®
❏ Windows Server 2008
❏ Windows XP
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Click Start — Help and Support.
Note:
For Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 operating
systems, if you use Online Help, switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support window.
2. In the Search Help box, enter firewall and then press the Enter key.
In the list, click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the instructions on the screen.
Enable the firewall after the installation of the printer software is complete.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
51
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Inserting the Software Disc
1. Insert the Software Disc into your computer's CD/DVD drive. When the AutoPlay window
appears, click Run setup.exe to start the Easy Install Navi.
Note:
If the CD does not automatically start or the AutoPlay window does not appear, click Start (start
for Windows XP) — Computer — D:\setup.exe (where D is the drive letter of your CD), and then
click OK.
USB Connection Setup
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Connect your computer and printer with a USB cable.
2. Turn on the printer.
3. Click Easy Install.
The SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT appears.
4. If you agree to the terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, select Agree and then click
Next.
Easy Install Navi launches.
5. Click Installing Drivers and Software.
6. Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
7. Select whether to restart your computer and click Finish to exit the wizard.
USB Printing
A personal printer is a printer connected to your computer or a print server using a USB. If your
printer is connected to a network and not to your computer, see “Network Connection Setup” on
page 53.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
52
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Network Connection Setup
Note:
❏ To use your printer in a Linux environment, you need to install print drivers for the Linux operating
systems. For details on how to install and use the drivers, see also “Installing Print Drivers on
Computers Running Linux (CUPS)” on page 104.
❏ When using a CD drive in a Linux environment, you need to mount the drive to your system
environment. The command strings are mount/media/CD-ROM.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Click Easy Install.
The SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT appears.
2. If you agree to the terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, select Agree and then click
Next.
Easy Install Navi launches.
3. Click Installing Drivers and Software.
4. Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
5. Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer
is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to
the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select I am setting up this printer on a
server check box.
Note:
If the installer displays 0.0.0.0 when you intend to use the AutoIP feature, you must enter a valid IP
address to continue.
6. Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
a Enter the printer name.
b If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select Share this printer with
other computers on the network, and then enter a share name that users can identify.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
53
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
c If you want to set a printer as the default for printing, select the Set this printer as default
for printing check box.
d If you want to set a printer as the default for scanning, select the Set this printer as default
for scanning check box.
e If you want to install the fax driver, select the Install fax driver check box.
7. Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install. You can specify
folders in which to install the software and documentation. To change the folders, click
Browse.
8. Click Finish to exit the wizard.
Configuring Wireless Network Settings (AL-MX200DWF only)
You can configure wireless network settings with the Easy Install Navi.
Important:
❏ Be sure to obtain the SSID and security information from a system administrator in advance when
you use a communications standard other than WPS to configure wireless network settings.
❏ Ensure that the Ethernet cable has been disconnected from the printer before you configure the
wireless network settings.
The wireless network specifications are described below:
Item
Specification
Connectivity
Wireless
Connectivity Standard
IEEE 802.11b/g compliant
Bandwidth
2.4 GHz
Data Transfer Rate
IEEE 802.11b mode: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g mode: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
Security
64 (40-bit key)/ 128 (104- bit key) WEP, WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)
(IEEE802.1x attestation function of WPA 1x non-corresponds)
Certifications
Wi-Fi, WPA2.0 (Personal)
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal Identification Number (PIN),
WPS2.0 supported
Printer Connection and Software Installation
54
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
You can select a method to configure wireless network settings from the following:
Wizard Setup Through USB Connection
Advanced Setup Through
Ethernet connection
Operator Panel
EpsonNet Config
WPS-PIN*1
WPS-PBC*2
*1 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi
®
Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices
required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN code in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through
access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
*2 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for
wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Network Settings
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Insert the Software Disc into your computer's CD/DVD drive. When the AutoPlay window
appears, click Run setup.exe to start the Install Navi.
2. Click Easy Install.
The SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT appears.
3. If you agree to the terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, select Agree and then click
Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
55
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Easy Install Navi launches.
4. Click Start Setup.
5. Click Configure Printer.
The connection type selection screen appears.
6. Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.
The setting method selection screen appears.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
56
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
7. Ensure that Wizard is selected, and then click Next.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the USB cable and perform other setup until the
Select Access Point screen appears.
9. Select either of the following:
❏ Click the Select from the found Access Points radio button and select the SSID.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
57
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Click the Input the SSID directly radio button and enter the SSID in the SSID box.
Note:
Up to five access points are displayed in order of intensity of radio waves. An access point with
low-intensity radio waves may not be displayed.
10. Click Next.
11. Enter for Passphrase for the SSID you specified above and click Next.
12. Configure the security setting, and then click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
58
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The IP Address Settings screen appears.
13. Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme.
When IPv4 is selected, configure the following:
a Select Type.
b If you have selected Use Manual Address from Type, enter the following items:
❏
IP Address of your printer
❏
Subnet Mask
❏
Gateway Address
When Dual Stack is selected, configure the following:
a Configure IPv4 Settings.
b If you have selected the Use Manual Address check box under IPv6 Settings, enter the
following items:
❏
IP Address of your printer
❏
Gateway Address
14. Click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
59
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The FAX Settings screen appears.
15. Configure the fax settings if necessary.
Note:
If you do not intend to use the fax feature, select the I don't use FAX functionality check box.
16. Click Next.
The Confirm the settings screen appears.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
60
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
17. Ensure that the wireless network settings are displayed, and then click Apply.
A confirmation window appears.
18. Click Yes.
19. Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish a wireless network connection and the
Configuration Complete screen appears.
20. Click Print Printer Setting.
21. Confirm that “Link Quality” is shown as “Good”, “Acceptable”, or “Low” on the report.
Note:
When “Link Quality” is shown as “No Reception”, check if the wireless network settings are correctly
configured. To reconfigure the wireless network settings, click Next on the Configuration
Complete screen and then click Return.
22. Click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
61
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
23. Follow the on-screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
24. Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel, and then click Start Installation.
If you see any errors, click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction.
25. Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Note:
If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following steps:
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
❏ Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
26. Select the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
27. Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
28. Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
62
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Network Settings
To use the Advanced setup, display the Configure Wireless Settings screen.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Displaying the Configure Wireless Settings Screen
1. Insert the Software Disc into your computer's CD/DVD drive. When the AutoPlay window
appears, click Run setup.exe to start the Install Navi.
2. Click Easy Install.
The SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT appears.
3. If you agree to the terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, select Agree and then click
Next.
Easy Install Navi launches.
4. Click Start Setup.
5. Click Configure Printer.
6. Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
63
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The setting method selection screen appears.
7. Select Advanced.
Select a connection method from the following
❏ “Ethernet Cable” on page 64
❏ “WPS-PIN” on page 70
❏ “WPS-PBC” on page 71
❏ “Operator Panel” on page 73
❏ “EpsonNet Config” on page 74
Ethernet Cable
1. Select Ethernet Cable, and then click Next.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions, and then click Next.
The Printer Setup Utility screen appears.
3. Select the printer to be configured in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
64
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
If the printer to be configured is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following
steps:
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
❏ Click Enter IP Address, and then enter the IP address of your printer.
4. Enter the SSID.
5. Select Type of wireless network.
6. Configure the security setting, and then click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
65
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The IP Address Settings screen appears.
7. Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme.
When IPv4 is selected, configure the following:
a Select Type.
b If you have selected Use Manual Address from Type, enter the following items:
❏
IP Address of your printer
❏
Subnet Mask
❏
Gateway Address
When Dual Stack is selected, configure the following:
a Configure IPv4 Settings.
b If you have selected the Use Manual Address check box under IPv6 Settings, enter the
following items:
❏
IP Address of your printer
❏
Gateway Address
8. Click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
66
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The FAX Settings screen appears.
9. Configure the fax settings if necessary.
Note:
If you do not intend to use the fax feature, select the I don't use FAX functionality check box.
10. Click Next.
The Confirm the settings screen appears.
11. Ensure that the wireless network settings are displayed, and then click Apply.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
67
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
A confirmation window appears.
12. Click Yes.
13. Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish a wireless network connection and the
Configuration Complete screen appears.
14. Click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
68
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
15. Follow the on-screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
16. Print the System Settings page using the operator panel.
See “Printing the System Settings Page” on page 156.
17. Confirm that “Link Quality” is shown as “Good”, “Acceptable”, or “Low” on the report.
Note:
When “Link Quality” is shown as “No Reception”, check if the wireless network settings are correctly
configured. To reconfigure the wireless network settings, click Return.
18. Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel, and then click Start Installation.
If you see any errors, click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction.
19. Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Note:
If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following steps:
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
❏ Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
69
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
20. Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
21. Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
22. Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
Note:
To make the specified wireless network settings effective, you need to restart the printer.
WPS-PIN
Note:
❏ WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and
register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN code to a printer and computer.
This setting, performed through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless
router supports WPS.
❏ Before WPS-PIN starts, you will need to enter your PIN code at the web page of the wireless access
point. See the access point manual for the details.
1. Select WPS-PIN, and then click Next.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
70
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel, and then click Start Installation.
If you see any errors, click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction.
4. Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Note:
If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following steps:
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
❏ Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
5. Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
6. Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
7. Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
When the WPS-PIN operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is
completed.
WPS-PBC
Note:
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register
devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via
wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available
only when the access point supports WPS.
1. Select WPS-PBC, and then click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
71
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Follow the on-screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3. Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel, and then click Start Installation.
If you see any errors, click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction.
4. Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Note:
If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following steps:
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
❏ Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
5. Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
6. Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
7. Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
72
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
For the WPS-PBC operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the
wireless LAN access point.
When the WPS-PBC operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is
completed.
Operator Panel
1. Select Operator Panel, and then click Next.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3. Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel, and then click Start Installation.
If you see any errors, click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction.
4. Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Note:
If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following steps:
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
73
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
5. Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
6. Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
7. Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
EpsonNet Config
1. Select EpsonNet Config, and then click Next.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.
3. Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel, and then click Start Installation.
If you see any errors, click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction.
4. Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen, and then click Next.
Note:
If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try either of the following steps:
Printer Connection and Software Installation
74
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Click Refresh to update the information.
❏ Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
5. Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
6. Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
7. Click Finish to exit this tool.
The wireless configuration is complete.
When EpsonNet Config operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection
is completed.
Setting Up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer (When You Need to Set Up Your
Wireless Connectivity With Your Computer)
For DHCP Networks:
1. Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:
Note:
You can also change the wireless network settings using the wireless application that may be installed
on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings
is selected.
Note:
Make note of the wireless network settings on the Advanced dialog box (step f) and the Wireless
network properties dialog box (step h). You may require these settings later.
e Click the Advanced button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
75
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog
box.
g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you
use)
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a Display Control Panel.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
76
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you use) from the
network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you use) from the
network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you use) from the
network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
2. Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
77
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
a On the operator panel, press the System button.
b Select Admin Menu, and then press the
c Select Network, and then press the
d Select TCP/IP, and then press the
e Select IPv4, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
f Select IP Address, and then press the
button.
(Default IP address range: 169.254.xxx.yyy)
IP Address
169.254.000.041*
3. Ensure that the IP Address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.
4. Launch your web browser.
5. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
78
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
6. Configure wireless network settings for the printer on EpsonNet Config.
7. Reboot the printer.
8. Restore the wireless network settings on your computer.
Note:
If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration software, use it to change
the wireless network settings. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings
is selected.
e Click Advanced.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
79
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure mode.
❏
For Ad hoc mode:
Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the dialog box.
❏
For Infrastructure mode:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the dialog box.
g Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.
i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the network, and then click Connect.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the network, and then click Connect.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
80
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the network, and then click Connect.
For Fixed IP Networks:
1. Set up your computer for wireless connectivity:
Note:
If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration software, use it to change
the wireless network settings. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings
is selected.
Note:
Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step f and step h so that you can restore
them later.
e Click the Advanced button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
81
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog
box.
g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you
use)
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a Display Control Panel.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
82
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you use) from the
network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you use) from the
network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select xxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device’s SSID which you use) from the
network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
83
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Check the IP address on your computer.
3. Set the IP address on the printer.
See “Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)” on page 45.
4. Launch your web browser.
5. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
84
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
6. Change the wireless network settings for the printer on EpsonNet Config.
7. Reboot the printer.
8. Restore the wireless network settings on your computer.
Note:
If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration software, use it to change
the wireless network settings. Or you can change the wireless network settings using the tool provided
with the operating system. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings
is selected.
e Click Advanced.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
85
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure mode.
❏
For Ad hoc mode:
Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the dialog box.
❏
For Infrastructure mode:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the dialog box.
g Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.
i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the network, and then click Connect.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the network, and then click Connect.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
86
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a Display Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the network, and then click Connect.
Setting Up the Printer for Shared Printing
One way to make a new printer available for other computers on a network is to use the Software Disc
supplied with your printer. Using the supplied CD is helpful in a way that it will install utilities
including Status Monitor as well. The following, however, describes the procedures for sharing a
printer on a network without using the supplied CD.
To set up a printer to be shared on a network, you need to set up the printer for network sharing and
install print drivers for the printer on every computer on the network.
Note:
You need to purchase an additional Ethernet cable at your own cost to connect a printer to an Ethernet
network.
Setting Up the Printer for Network Sharing
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition
1. Click Start (start for Windows XP) — Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the icon for your printer and select Properties.
3. From the Sharing tab, select Share this printer, and then enter a name in the Share name text
box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your
printer.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
87
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. Click OK.
If the files are not present in your computer, and then you will be prompted to insert the server
operating system CD.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK.
For Windows Vista and Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3. Click Change sharing options button.
4. The “Windows needs your permission to continue” appears.
5. Click Continue button.
6. Select the Share this printer check box, and then enter a name in the Share name text box.
7. Select Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your
printer.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Apply, and then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3. Select the Share this printer check box, and then enter a name in the Share name text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your
printer.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
88
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, and Windows Server 2008 R2
1. Click Start — Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. On the Sharing tab, select the Share this printer check box, and then enter a name in the Share
name text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your
printer.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK.
To check that the printer is shared:
❏ Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes or Devices and Printers
folder is shared. The share icon is shown under the printer icon.
❏ Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server and look for the shared
name you assigned to the printer.
Installing Print Drivers
Now that the printer is set for shared printing, you need to install print drivers for the shared printer
using either of the two Windows features.
Using the Point and Print Feature
The Point and Print feature is a Windows technology that automatically downloads and installs a print
driver necessary for using the shared printer on the network.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2003
x64 Edition
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My Network Places.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
89
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object is
added to the Printers and Faxes folder. It may take some time depending on the amount of
network traffic.
Close My Network Places.
4. Print a test page to verify installation.
a Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition) — Printers
and Faxes.
b Select the printer you have installed.
c Click File — Properties.
d On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista and Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start — Network.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
90
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Locate and double-click the host name of the server computer.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Click Continue in the User Account Control dialog box.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object is
added to the Printers folder. It may take some time depending on the amount of network traffic.
6. Print a test page to verify installation.
a Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound.
b Select Printers.
c Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.
d On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start — Network.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object will
be added to the Printers folder. It may take some time depending on the amount of network
traffic.
6. Print a test page to verify installation.
a Click Start — Control Panel.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
91
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
b Select Hardware and Sound.
c Select Printers.
d Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.
e On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, and Windows Server 2008 R2
1. Click Start — Computer — Network.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object will
be added to the Devices and Printers folder. It may take some time depending on the amount of
network traffic.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
92
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Print a test page to verify installation.
a Click Start — Devices and Printers.
b Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.
c On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Using the Peer-to-Peer Feature
With the peer-to-peer feature, you need to specify the shared printer to install a print driver.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2003
x64 Edition
1. Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition) — Printers and
Faxes.
2. Click Add a printer (Add Printer for Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition)
to launch the Add Printer Wizard.
3. Click Next.
4. Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next.
5. Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
93
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Select the printer, and then click Next. If the printer is not listed, click Back and enter the path to
the printer in the text box.
For example:\\[server host name]\[shared printer name]
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The
shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a print driver. If no system driver is
available, specify the location where the driver is available.
7. Select Yes if you want your printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
8. Click Finish.
For Windows Vista and Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers.
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
94
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and enter the path to the printer in
the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example:\\[server host name]\[shared printer name]
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The
shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a print driver. If no system driver is
available, specify the location where the driver is available.
4. Confirm the printer name, and then select whether to use your printer as the default printer and
click Next.
5. If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
6. Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers.
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
95
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and enter the path to the printer in
the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\[server host name]\[shared printer name]
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The
shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a print driver. If no system driver is
available, specify the location where the driver is available.
4. Confirm the printer name, and then select whether to use your printer as the default printer and
click Next.
5. Select whether to share your printer or not.
6. If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7. Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, and Windows Server 2008 R2
1. Click Start — Devices and Printers.
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
96
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed. Click Select a shared printer by
name and enter the path to the printer in the text box, and then click Next.
For example:\\[server host name]\[shared printer name]
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The
shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a print driver. If no system driver is
available, you need to specify the path to the available drivers.
4. Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
5. Select whether to use your printer as the default printer.
6. If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7. Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Using Epson Universal P6 Printer Driver
Epson Universal P6 Printer Driver is the universal PCL6 compatible print driver that has the following
features:
❏ It supports the basic print functions needed for the business situation.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
97
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ It supports multiple Epson business printers besides this printer.
❏ It supports most languages among the print drivers for this printer.
Computer system requirements
If your CD/DVD drive is D:, open Epson_Universal_P6_Supplement.txt in the D:\Drivers
\PCLUniversal, and refer to Supported OS.
Your computer must be running one of the supported Microsoft Windows versions listed there, and
must meet the system requirements of its operating system.
Supported Printers
If your CD/DVD drive is D:, open Epson_Universal_P6_Supplement.txt in the D:\Drivers
\PCLUniversal, and refer to Supported Printers.
Supported Languages
If your CD/DVD drive is D:, open Epson_Universal_P6_Supplement.txt in the D:\Drivers
\PCLUniversal, and refer to Supported Languages.
Installing the Printer Driver
1. Insert the printer Software Disc into your CD/DVD drive.
2. If your CD/DVD drive is D:, double-click setup.exe in the D:\Drivers\PCLUniversal\Win32\
for 32-bit Windows OS or D:\Drivers\PCLUniversal\Win64\ for 64-bit Windows OS.
Note:
Change the drive letter as needed for your system.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
After the installation is done, access your printer's Properties to customize the settings and
Printing Preferences to make the appropriate printer driver settings.
Note:
The printer driver's online help provides details on printer driver settings.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
98
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Uninstalling the printer driver
Note:
The procedure below uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Close all applications.
2. Access Program and Features on the Control Panel.
3. Select Epson Universal Laser P6, and then click Uninstall/Change.
Follow the on screen instructions.
Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X
For information on how to install print drivers, refer to the PostScript Level3 Compatible User’s
Guide.
Configuring Wireless Settings on the Operator Panel (AL-MX200DWF only)
You can configure wireless settings on the operator panel.
Important:
❏ The Wireless LAN feature is unavailable depending on the region you purchased.
❏ Be sure to get the SSID and security information from a system administrator in advance when you
use other than WPS to configure wireless settings.
❏ Ensure that the Ethernet cable has been disconnected from the printer before you configure the
wireless settings.
Note:
❏ Before you configure the wireless settings on the operator panel, you need to set up the wireless
network settings on your computer. For details, see the Wireless Network Setup Guide.
❏ For information on the specifications of the wireless LAN feature, see “Configuring Wireless Network
Settings (AL-MX200DWF only)” on page 54.
You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:
Printer Connection and Software Installation
99
AL-MX200 Series
Manual Setup For
User’s Guide
Access Point (Infrastructure) Network
Computer-to-computer (Ad-hoc) Network
Automatic Setup Using
WPS-PIN*1
WPS-PBC*2
*1 WPS-PIN is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN code in the
printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available only when the access points of your
wireless router supports WPS.
*2 WPS-PBC is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing the button
provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This
setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Setup
You can manually configure wireless settings to connect your printer to an access point
(infrastructure) network or computer-to-computer (ad-hoc) network.
Connecting to Access Point Network
To configure the wireless settings through an access point such as a wireless router:
1. On the operator panel, press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Network, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Select Wireless Setup, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired access point, and then press the
button.
If the desired access point does not appear:
a
Select Manual Setup, and then press the
b
Enter the SSID, and then press the
button.
button.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value, and press the
cursor.
c
Select Infrastructure, and then press the
or
button to move a
button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
100
AL-MX200 Series
d
Select an encryption type, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
Important:
Be sure to use one of the supported encryption methods to protect your network traffic.
6. Enter the WEP key or pass phrase, and then press the
button.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value, and press the
or
button to move a cursor.
When the encryption type is WEP, select a transmit key after entering the WEP key.
7. Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network.
8. Print a System Settings page from the operator panel.
See “Printing and Checking the System Settings Page” on page 48.
9. Confirm that "Link Quality" is shown as "Good", "Acceptable" or "Low" on the report.
Note:
When "Link Quality" is "No Reception", check if the wireless settings are correctly configured.
Using Ad Hoc Connection
To configure the wireless settings for an ad-hoc connection where the wireless devices communicate
directly with each other without an access point:
1. On the operator panel, press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Network, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Select Wireless Setup, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired access point, and then press the
button.
If the desired access point does not appear:
a
Select Manual Setup, and then press the
button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
101
AL-MX200 Series
b Enter the SSID, and then press the
button.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value, and press the
cursor.
c
Select Ad-hoc, and then press the
User’s Guide
or
button to move a
button.
d Select an encryption type, and then press the
button.
Important:
Be sure to use one of the supported encryption methods to protect your network traffic.
6. Enter the WEP key, and then press the
button.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value, and press the
or
button to move a cursor.
7. Select a transmit key.
8. Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network.
9. Print a System Settings page from the operator panel.
See “Printing and Checking the System Settings Page” on page 48.
10. Confirm that "Link Quality" is shown as "Good", "Acceptable" or "Low" on the report.
Note:
When "Link Quality" is "No Reception", check if the wireless settings are correctly configured.
Auto Setup With the Access Point
If the access point such as a wireless router supports the WPS, security settings can be made
automatically.
WPS-PBC
Note:
WPS-PBC is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by
pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC
setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
1. On the operator panel, press the System button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
102
AL-MX200 Series
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Network, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Select WPS Setup, and then press the
button.
5. Select Push Button Control, and then press the
6. Select Yes, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
button.
7. Press and hold the WPS button on the access point.
8. Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network.
9. Print a System Settings page from the operator panel.
See “Printing and Checking the System Settings Page” on page 48.
10. Confirm that "Link Quality" is shown as "Good", "Acceptable" or "Low" on the report.
Note:
When "Link Quality" is "No Reception", check if the wireless settings are correctly configured.
WPS-PIN
Note:
❏ WPS-PIN is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by
entering PIN code to a printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is
available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
❏ Before WPS-PIN starts, you will need to enter your PIN code at the web page of the wireless access
point. See the access point manual for the details.
1. On the operator panel, press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Network, and then press the
4. Select WPS Setup, and then press the
5. Select PIN Code, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
103
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Take a note of PIN code displayed on the operator panel.
7. Select Start Configuration, and then press the
button.
8. If SSID selection screen appears, select the SSID, and then press the
button.
9. Enter the PIN code of the printer at the web page of the wireless access point.
10. Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network.
11. Print a System Settings page from the operator panel.
See “Printing and Checking the System Settings Page” on page 48.
12. Confirm that "Link Quality" is shown as "Good", "Acceptable" or "Low" on the report.
Note:
When "Link Quality" is "No Reception", check if the wireless settings are correctly configured.
Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux (CUPS)
This section provides information on installing and setting up print drivers with CUPS (Common
UNIX Printing System) on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (x86), SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop 11 (x86), and Ubuntu 10 (x86). For the information on the previous versions of the Linux
operating systems, visit respective web sites.
®
®
Installing Print Drivers
Note:
The print driver EPSON-AL_MX200-x.x-y.noarch.rpm or epson-al_mx200_x.x-y_all.deb is
included in the linux folder on the Software Disc.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (x86)
1. Double-click EPSON-AL_MX200-x.x-y.noarch.rpm on the Software Disc.
2. Click Install.
3. Enter the administrator's password, and then click Authenticate.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
104
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window automatically closes.
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (x86)
1. Double-click EPSON-AL_MX200-x.x-y.noarch.rpm on the Software Disc.
2. Click Install.
3. Enter the administrator's password, and then click Authenticate.
Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window automatically closes.
For Ubuntu 10 (x86)
1. Double-click epson-al_mx200_x.x-y_all.deb on the Software Disc.
2. Click Install Package.
3. Enter the user password, and click OK.
4. Click Close.
5. Click the X button at the top-right of the dialog box to close the Package Installer dialog box.
Specifying the Queue
To perform printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
Note:
When you have finished specifying the queue, you can then send print jobs from applications. Start a
print job from an application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box. Depending on the
application (Mozilla, for example), however, you may have to use the default queue for printing. In such
a case, you must specify a queue you want to use as the default queue. For details on specifying the default
queue, see “Specifying the Default Queue” on page 110.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (x86)
1. Open the URL “http://localhost:631” using a web browser.
2. Click Administration.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
105
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Click Add Printer.
4. Enter root as the user name, and then enter the administrator password.
5. Click OK.
6. Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.
For a network printer:
a Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and then click
Continue.
b Enter the IP address of the printer in Connection.
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)
c Click Continue.
d Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box, and then click
Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional
information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
For a USB printer connected to a computer running the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
(x86):
a Select EPSON AL-MX200 X (EPSON AL-MX200 X) from the Local Printers menu, and
then click Continue.
b Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box, and then click
Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional
information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
106
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
7. Select Epson from the Make menu, and then click Continue.
8. Select Epson AL-MX200 xxx PS3 vX.Y (en) from the Model menu, and then click Add
Printer.
The setup is complete.
You can optionally specify the default options settings of the printer.
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (x86)
1. Select Computer — More Applications..., and then select YaST on the Application Browser.
2. Enter the administrator password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3. Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and then select Printer.
The Printer Configurations dialog box appears.
4. Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.
For a network printer:
a Click Add.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears.
b Click Connection Wizard.
The Connection Wizard dialog box appears.
c Select Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or
Printserver Box via.
d Enter the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name:.
e Select Epson in Select the printer manufacturer:.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
107
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
f Click OK.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears.
g Select EPSON AL-MX200XX PS3 vX.Y [EPSON AL-MX200XX PS3.PPD] from the Assign
Driver list.
Note:
You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
For a USB printer connected to a computer running the SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:
a Click Add.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears.
The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list.
b Select EPSON AL-MX200XX PS3 vX.Y [EPSON AL-MX200XX PS3.PPD] from the Assign
Driver list.
Note:
You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
5. Confirm the settings, and then click OK.
For Ubuntu 10 (x86)
1. Open the URL “http://localhost:631” using a web browser.
2. Click Administration.
3. Click Add Printer.
4. Enter the User Name and the Password, and then click OK.
5. Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.
For a network printer:
Printer Connection and Software Installation
108
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
a Select EPSON AL-MX200(XX:XX:XX) (EPSON AL-MX200 X) from Discovered Network
Printer.
b Click Continue.
c Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box, and then click
Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional
information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
For a USB printer connected to a computer running the Ubuntu 10 (x86):
a Select EPSON AL-MX200 X (EPSON AL-MX200 X) from the Local Printers menu, and
then click Continue.
b Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box, and then click
Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional
information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
6. Select Epson from the Make menu, and then click Continue.
7. Select Epson AL-MX200 xxx PS3 vX.Y (en) from the Model menu, and then click Add
Printer.
The setup is complete.
You can optionally specify the default options settings of the printer.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
109
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Specifying the Default Queue
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (x86)
1. Select Applications — System Tools — Terminal.
2. Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Enter the administrator password)
lpadmin -d (Enter the queue name)
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (x86)
1. Select Computer — More Applications..., and then select YaST on the Application
Browser.
2. Enter the administrator password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3. Select Printer from Hardware.
The Printer Configurations dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit.
A dialog box to modify the specified queue appears.
5. Confirm that the printer you want to specify as the default queue is selected in the Connection
list.
6. Select the Default Printer check box.
7. Confirm the settings, and then click OK.
For Ubuntu 10 (x86)
1. Select System — Administration — Printing.
2. Select the printer you want to specify as the default queue.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
110
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Select the Printer menu.
4. Select Set As Default.
5. Select whether to set this printer as the system-wide default printer, and then click OK.
Specifying Printing Options
You can specify printing options such as the duplex (2-sided) printing.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (x86)
1. Open the URL “http://localhost:631” using a web browser.
2. Click Administration.
3. Click Manage Printers.
4. Click the queue name for which you want to specify printing options.
5. Click the Administration drop down box, and then select Modify Printer.
6. Specify necessary printing options, and then click Continue or Modify Printer.
The message Printer EPSON AL-MX200 X has been modified successfully. appears.
The setting is complete.
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (x86)
1. Open a web browser.
2. Enter “http://localhost:631/admin” in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
The CUPS window appears.
Note:
Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you
have not set it, see “Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator” on
page 112.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
111
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Click Manage Printers.
4. Click Modify Printer on the printer.
5. Specify necessary printing options, and then click Continue.
6. Enter root as the user name, enter the administrator password, and then click OK.
The message Printer EPSON AL-MX200 X has been modified successfully. appears.
The setting is complete.
For Ubuntu 10 (x86)
1. Open the URL “http://localhost:631” using a web browser.
2. Click Administration.
3. Click Manage Printers.
4. Click the queue name for which you want to specify printing options.
5. Click the Administration drop down box, and then select Modify Printer.
6. Enter the User Name and the Password, and then click OK.
7. Select the printer you want to modify.
8. Specify necessary printing options, and then click Continue or Modify Printer.
The message Printer EPSON AL-MX200 X has been modified successfully. appears.
The setting is complete.
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 and 11, you must set the password for authority as the printer
administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
112
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (x86)
1. Select Computer — More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application
Browser.
2. Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
lppasswd -g sys -a root
(Enter the password for authority as the printer administrator after
the Enter password prompt.)
(Reenter the password for authority as the printer administrator
after the Enter password again prompt.)
Uninstalling Print Drivers
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (x86)
1. Select Applications — System Tools — Terminal.
2. Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
(Enter the administrator password)
lpadmin -x (Enter the print queue name)
3. Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4. Enter the following command in the terminal window.
rpm -e EPSON-AL-MX200-x.x
The print driver is uninstalled.
For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (x86)
1. Select Computer — More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application
Browser.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
113
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
lpadmin -x (Enter the print queue name)
3. Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4. Enter the following command in the terminal window.
rpm -e EPSON-AL-MX200-x.x
The print driver is uninstalled.
For Ubuntu 10 (x86)
1. Select Applications — Accessories — Terminal.
2. Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
sudo lpadmin -x (Enter the print queue name)
(Enter the user password)
3. Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4. Enter the following command in the terminal window.
sudo dpkg -r epson-al-mx200
(Enter the user password if required)
The print driver is uninstalled.
Printer Connection and Software Installation
114
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 5
Printing Basics
About Print Media
Using paper that is not appropriate for the printer can cause paper jams, image quality problems, or
printer failures. To achieve the best performance from your printer, we recommend you use only the
paper described in this section.
When using paper other than that recommended, contact our local representative office or authorized
dealer.
Print Media Usage Guidelines
The paper tray accommodates various sizes and types of paper and other specialty media. Follow these
guidelines when loading paper and media:
❏ Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
❏ For 60 to 135 gsm (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long, where the paper fibers run along the length
of the paper, is recommended. For paper heavier than 135 gsm (36 lb bond), grain short, where the
paper fibers run along the width of the paper, is preferred.
❏ Envelopes can be printed from the paper tray and the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).
❏ Fan paper or other specialty media before loading in the paper tray.
❏ Do not print on label stock once a label has been removed from a sheet.
❏ Use only paper envelopes. Do not use envelopes with windows, metal clasps, or adhesives with
release strips.
❏ Print all envelopes single-sided only.
❏ Some wrinkling and embossing may occur when printing envelopes.
❏ When loading print media in the paper tray, do not load it above the fill line on the paper width
guides of the paper tray.
❏ Slide the paper width guides to adjust to the paper size.
❏ If excessive jams or wrinkles occur, use paper or other media from a new package.
Printing Basics
115
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
! Warning:
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper.
When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
See Also:
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
❏ “Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray” on page 128
❏ “Loading Envelopes in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 135
❏ “Printing on Custom Size Paper” on page 154
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Guidelines
The ADF can accommodate the paper of the following sizes:
❏ Width: 148–215.9 mm (5.83–8.50 inches)
❏ Length: 210–355.6 mm (8.27–14.00 inches)
The supported paper weight ranges from 60 to 105 gsm.
Follow the guidelines below when loading source documents into the ADF:
❏ Load documents face up so that the top of the document enters the printer first.
❏ Place only loose sheets of paper in the ADF.
❏ Adjust the document guides so that they fit against the documents.
❏ Insert paper in the document feeder tray only when the ink on the paper is completely dry.
Printing Basics
116
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Do not load documents above the MAX fill line. You can load up to 50 sheets of 64 gsm documents.
Note:
You cannot load the following documents on the ADF. Be sure to place them on the document glass.
Curled documents
Pre-punched paper
Lightweight documents
Folded, creased or torn documents
Cut and paste documents
Carbon paper
Print Media That Can Damage Your Printer
Your printer is designed to use a variety of media types for print jobs. However, some media can cause
poor output quality, excessive paper jams, or damage to your printer.
Unacceptable media includes:
❏ Paper that is too heavyweight or too lightweight (less than 60 gsm or more than 190 gsm)
❏ Transparencies
❏ Photo paper or coated paper
❏ Tracing paper
❏ Illumination film
❏ Special ink jet printer paper and ink jet transparencies
❏ Static-cling paper
Printing Basics
117
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Pasted-up or glued paper
❏ Specially coated paper
❏ Color paper with surface treatments
❏ Paper that uses ink that deteriorates with heat
❏ Photosensitive paper
❏ Carbon paper or carbonless copy paper
❏ Paper with a rough surface, such as Japanese paper, pulp paper or fibrous paper
❏ Envelopes that are not flat, or that have clasps, windows or adhesives with release strips
❏ Padded envelopes
❏ Tack film
❏ Water transfer paper
❏ Textile transfer paper
❏ Perforated paper
❏ Leather paper, embossed paper
❏ Conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper
❏ Wrinkled, creased, folded, or ripped paper
❏ Damp or wet paper
❏ Wavy or curled paper
❏ Paper with staples, clips, ribbons, or tape
❏ Label paper with some labels already peeled off, or that are partially cut off
❏ Paper pre-printed by another printer or copy machine
❏ Paper pre-printed all over rear side
! Warning:
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper.
When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
Printing Basics
118
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Print Media Storage Guidelines
Providing good storage conditions for your paper and other media contributes to optimum print
quality.
❏ Store print media in dark, cool, relatively dry locations. Most paper items are susceptible to
damage from ultraviolet (UV) and visible light. UV radiation, which is emitted by the sun and
fluorescent bulbs, is particularly damaging to paper items. The intensity and length of exposure to
visible light on paper items should be reduced as much as possible.
❏ Maintain constant temperatures and relative humidity.
❏ Avoid attics, kitchens, garages, and basements for storing print media.
❏ Store print media flat. Print media should be stored on pallets, cartons, shelves, or in cabinets.
❏ Avoid having food or drinks in the area where print media is stored or handled.
❏ Do not open sealed packages of paper until you are ready to load them into the printer. Leave paper
in the original packaging. For most commercial cut-size grades, the ream wrapper contains an
inner lining that protects the paper from moisture loss or gain.
❏ Leave the media inside the bag until you are ready to use it; reinsert unused media in the bag and
reseal it for protection. Some specialty media is packaged inside resealable plastic bags.
Supported Print Media
Using unsuitable print media may lead to paper jams, poor print quality, breakdown and damage to
your printer. To use the features of your printer effectively, use the suggested print media that is
recommended here.
Important:
The toner may come off the print media, if it gets wet by water, rain, steam and so on. For more
information, contact our local representative office or authorized dealer.
Usable Print Media
The types of print media that can be used on your printer are as follows:
Printing Basics
119
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Paper Tray
Paper Size
A4 SEF (210 × 297 mm)
B5 SEF (182 × 257 mm)
A5 SEF (148 × 210 mm)
Letter SEF (8.5 × 11 inches)
Executive SEF (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Legal 13 (Folio) SEF (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal 14 SEF (8.5 × 14 inches)
Statement SEF (139.7 × 215.9 mm)
Com-10 Envelope SEF (4.125 × 9.5 inches)
Monarch Envelope SEF (3.875 × 7.5 inches)
Monarch Envelope LEF (7.5 × 3.875 inches)*
DL Envelope SEF (110 × 220 mm)
DL Envelope LEF (220 × 110 mm)*
C5 Envelope SEF (162 × 229 mm)
Postcard (100 × 148 mm)
Postcard (148 × 200 mm)
Yougata 2 Envelope SEF (114 × 162 mm)
Yougata 2 Envelope LEF (162 × 114 mm)*
Yougata 3 Envelope SEF (98 × 148 mm)
Yougata 3 Envelope LEF (148 × 98 mm)*
Yougata 4 Envelope (105 × 235 mm)
Yougata 6 Envelope (98 × 190 mm)
Younaga 3 Envelope (120 × 235 mm)
Nagagata 3 Envelope (120 × 235 mm)
Nagagata 4 Envelope (90 × 205 mm)
Kakugata 3 Envelope (216 × 277 mm)
Custom size:
Width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm (3 - 8.5 inches)
Length: 127 - 355.6 mm (5 - 14 inches)
Printing Basics
120
AL-MX200 Series
Paper Type
User’s Guide
Plain (60 - 105 gsm)
Lightweight Cardstock (106 - 163 gsm)
Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Postcard JPN
Loading Capacity
*
250 sheets of standard paper
You can load Monarch, DL, Yougata 2, and Yougata 3 envelopes in the LEF orientation into the paper tray with the flap
unfolded.
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Paper Size
A4 SEF (210 × 297 mm)
B5 SEF (182 × 257 mm)
A5 SEF (148 × 210 mm)
Letter SEF (8.5 × 11 inches)
Executive SEF (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Legal 13 (Folio) SEF (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal 14 SEF (8.5 × 14 inches)
Statement SEF (139.7 × 215.9 mm)
Com-10 Envelope SEF (4.125 × 9.5 inches)
DL Envelope SEF (110 × 220 mm)
C5 Envelope SEF (162 × 229 mm)
Yougata 4 Envelope (105 × 235 mm)
Younaga 3 Envelope (120 × 235 mm)
Nagagata 3 Envelope (120 × 235 mm)
Kakugata 3 Envelope (216 × 277 mm)
Custom size:
Width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm (3 - 8.5 inches)
Length: 210 - 355.6 mm (8.2 - 14 inches)
Printing Basics
121
AL-MX200 Series
Paper Type
User’s Guide
Plain (60 - 105 gsm)
Lightweight Cardstock (106 - 163 gsm)
Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Loading Capacity
10 sheets of plain paper/one sheet of lightweight cardstock paper
Note:
❏ SEF and LEF indicate the paper feed orientation; SEF stands for short-edge feed. LEF stands for
long-edge feed.
❏ Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper on your printer.
See Also:
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
❏ “Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray” on page 128
❏ “Loading Envelopes in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 135
Printing on print media that differs from the paper size or paper type selected on the print driver may
lead to paper jams. To ensure that printing is correctly done, select the correct paper size and paper
type.
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information
is usually on the print media package.
Note:
After loading paper in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), specify the same paper type on
the operator panel.
Printing Basics
122
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Capacity
The paper tray can accommodate:
❏ 250 sheets of standard paper
❏ 27.5 mm (1.08 inches) of thick paper
❏ 27.5 mm (1.08 inches) of postcards
❏ Ten envelopes
❏ Twenty labels
The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can accommodate:
❏ 10 sheets of plain paper or one sheet of lightweight cardstock paper
Print Media Dimensions
The paper tray can accommodate print media within the following dimensions:
❏ Width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm (3.00 - 8.50 inches)
❏ Length: 127.0 - 355.6 mm (5.00 - 14.00 inches)
The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can accommodate print media within the following dimensions:
❏ Width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm (3.00 - 8.50 inches)
❏ Length: 210.0 - 355.6 mm (8.20 - 14.00 inches)
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
Note:
❏ When you are printing on any print media that is smaller than the A5 size paper, be sure to load it in
the paper tray.
❏ To avoid paper jams, do not remove the paper tray while printing is in progress.
❏ Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper on your printer.
Printing Basics
123
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ For manually loading print media for duplex (2-sided) printing, see “Manual Duplex Printing (PCL
Print Driver Only)” on page 142.
❏ Do not wipe the pink-tinted grease off as doing so may cause paper to misfeed.
1. Pull the paper tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the tray with both hands, remove it from
the printer, and then remove the paper tray cover from the paper tray.
Printing Basics
124
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Hold the paper tray end with one hand, push and hold the paper tray extension lever with the other
hand, and then extend the tray to your desired length.
Note:
The paper tray can accommodate a stack of A5 paper by default, and is designed to extend in two
lengths. To load A4 paper media, extend the paper tray to the mid length. To load longer paper
media, extend it to the full length.
3. Slide the paper width guides and the length guide to the maximum positions.
Printing Basics
125
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the
edges of the stack on a level surface.
5. Load the print media into the paper tray with the recommended print surface facing up.
Note:
Do not load paper media above the fill line on the paper width guides of the paper tray as it may cause
paper jams.
6. Slide the paper width guides and then the length guide inward until they rest lightly against the
edges of the print media stack.
Printing Basics
126
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
7. Replace the paper tray cover onto the paper tray.
Note:
The paper tray cover can protect the loaded print media from dust and from absorbing moisture.
8. Hold the paper tray with both hands and push it into the printer until it clicks into place.
9. Select the paper type on the print driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper. If a
user-specified print media is loaded in the paper tray, you must specify the paper size on the print
driver.
Note:
For details on specifying the paper size and type on the print driver, refer to the Help provided for the print
driver.
Printing Basics
127
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray
Follow the guidelines below to load envelopes in the paper tray.
Note:
❏ When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope on the print driver. If not specified, the
print image will be rotated 180 degrees.
❏ If you do not load envelopes in the paper tray right after they have been removed from the packaging,
they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below before loading them in the paper tray.
Printing Basics
128
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the
following illustration. The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.
Important:
Never use envelopes with a window or coated linings as it causes paper jams that may result in damage to
the printer.
Loading Com-10, Yougata 4/6, or Younaga 3 Envelopes
Load envelopes with the print surface facing up. Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the
right of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope.
Printing Basics
129
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Loading Monarch, DL, or Yougata 2/3 Envelopes
You can load Monarch, DL, and Yougata 2/3 Envelopes in either of the following orientations:
SEF: Load envelopes with the print surface facing up. Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward
the right of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope.
LEF: Load envelopes with the print surface facing up. Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward
the front of the printer and the flaps are left unfolded.
Note:
❏ When you load the envelopes in the LEF orientation, be sure to specify the landscape orientation on
the print driver.
❏ To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes, see the instructions on the
Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator dialog box of the print driver.
Loading C5, Nagagata 3/4, or Kakugata 3 Envelopes
Load envelopes with the print surface facing up. Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the
rear of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope.
Printing Basics
130
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Loading Postcards in the Paper Tray
Note:
❏ When you print on postcards, be sure to specify the postcard on the print driver for the optimum print
result.
❏ If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the
following illustration. The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.
Loading Postcards
Load postcards with the print surface facing up and the top edge first.
Printing Basics
131
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Loading W-Postcards
Load W-postcards with the print surface facing up and the left edge first.
Note:
To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as postcards, see the instructions on the
Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator dialog box of the print driver.
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Note:
❏ Before you use the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), make sure that the printer has the paper tray
inserted.
❏ Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper on your printer.
❏ For manually loading print media for duplex (2-sided) printing, see “Manual Duplex Printing (PCL
Print Driver Only)” on page 142.
1. Open the front cover.
Printing Basics
132
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Slide the paper width guides to the maximum positions.
3. Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the
edges of the stack on a level surface.
Printing Basics
133
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the
following illustration. The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.
4. Load print media in the PSI with the top edge first and the recommended print surface facing
up.
Printing Basics
134
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. Slide the paper width guides inward until they rest lightly against the edges of the print media
stack.
6. Select the paper type on the print driver if the loaded print media is not plain paper. If a
user-specified print media is loaded in the PSI, you must specify the paper size on the print driver.
Note:
For details on specifying the paper size and type on the print driver, refer to the Help provided for the print
driver.
Loading Envelopes in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Follow the guidelines below to load envelopes in the PSI.
Note:
❏ Be sure to insert envelopes all the way in. Otherwise, print media that is loaded in the paper tray will
be fed.
❏ When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope on the print driver. If not specified, the
print image will be rotated 180 degrees.
❏ If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed from the packaging, they
may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below before loading them in the PSI.
Printing Basics
135
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the
following illustration. The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.
Important:
Never use envelopes with a window or coated linings as it causes paper jams that may result in damage to
the printer.
Printing Basics
136
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Loading Com-10, DL, Yougata 4/6, or Younaga 3 Envelopes
Load envelopes with the print surface facing up. Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the
right of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope.
Loading C5, Nagagata 3, or Kakugata 3 Envelopes
Load envelopes with the print surface facing up. Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the
front of the printer and the flaps are left unfolded.
Using the Output Tray Extension
The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the printer after the
print job is complete.
Printing Basics
137
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Before printing a long length document, be sure to pull out the output tray extension.
Note:
To pull out envelopes or small print media from the center output tray, lift up the scanner unit.
Setting Paper Sizes and Types
When loading print media, set the paper size and type on the operator panel before printing.
This section describes how to set the paper size and type on the operator panel.
See Also:
“Understanding the Operator Panel Menus” on page 264
Setting Paper Sizes
1. Press the System button.
Printing Basics
138
AL-MX200 Series
2. Select Tray Settings, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
3. Select Paper Tray, and then press the
button.
4. Select Paper Size, and then press the
button.
5. Select the correct paper size for the print media loaded, and then press the
button.
Setting Paper Types
Important:
The paper type must match those of the actual print media loaded in the paper tray. Otherwise,
print-quality problems can occur.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Tray Settings, and then press the
button.
3. Select Paper Tray, and then press the
button.
4. Select Paper Type, and then press the
button.
5. Select the correct paper type for the print media loaded, and then press the
button.
Printing
This section covers how to print documents from your printer and how to cancel a job.
Printing from the Computer
Install the print driver to use all the features of the printer. When you choose Print from an
application, a window representing the print driver appears. Select the appropriate settings for the file
to print. Print settings selected on the print driver have precedence over the default menu settings
selected on the operator panel or the Printer Setting Utility.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 WordPad as an example.
Printing Basics
139
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Clicking Preferences on the initial Print dialog box enables you to change the print settings. If you
are not familiar with features on the print driver window, open the Help for additional information.
1. Open the file you want to print.
2. From the file menu, select Print.
3. Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the print settings as needed
(such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies).
4. To adjust print settings not available from the first screen, such as Paper Size, Paper Type, or
Feed Orientation, click Preferences.
The Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
5. Specify the print settings. For more information, click Help.
6. Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
7. Click Print to send the job to the selected printer.
Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a print job.
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
1. Press the
(Stop) button.
Note:
Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.
Canceling a Job From the Computer (Windows)
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar
When you send a print job, a small printer icon appears on the taskbar.
1. Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
Printing Basics
140
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Select the job you want to cancel.
3. Press the Delete key.
4. Click Yes on the Printers dialog box to cancel a print job.
Canceling a Job From the Desktop
1. Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
Click start — Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP).
®
Click Start — Printers and Faxes (for Windows Server 2003).
Click Start — Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2).
®
Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers (for Windows Vista and
Windows Server 2008).
A list of available printers appears.
2. Double-click the printer you selected when you sent the job.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
3. Select the job you want to cancel.
4. Press the Delete key.
5. Click Yes on the Printers dialog box to cancel a print job.
Duplex Printing
Duplex (2-sided) printing allows you to print on either side of a sheet of paper. The paper sizes
available for duplex printing are A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, Folio, and Legal.
Automatic Duplex Printing
®
The following procedure uses the PCL 6 driver as an example.
1. Click start — Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP).
Printing Basics
141
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Click Start — Printers and Faxes (for Windows Server 2003).
Click Start — Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2).
Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers (for Windows Vista).
Click Start — Control Panel — Printers (for Windows Server 2008).
A list of available printers appears.
2. Right-click the icon for your printer and select Printing preferences.
The Paper/Output tab appears.
3. From Duplex, select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge.
4. Click OK.
Manual Duplex Printing (PCL Print Driver Only)
When you have a problem with automatic duplex printing, you may want to try manual duplex
printing. Starting manual duplex printing displays a window containing the instructions that you can
follow. Note that the window cannot be reopened once it is closed. Do not close the window until
duplex printing is complete.
Note:
When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper before inserting the paper.
Operations on Your Computer
The following procedure uses Windows 7 WordPad as an example.
Note:
The way to display the Printer Properties/Printing Preferences dialog box depends on the application
software. Refer to the manual of your application software.
1. From the file menu, select Print.
2. Select the printer from the Select Printer list box, and then click Preferences.
The Paper/Output tab of the Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
Printing Basics
142
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. From Duplex, select either Flip on Short Edge (Manual) or Flip on Long Edge (Manual) to
define the way 2-sided print pages are bound.
4. From Paper Size, select the size of the document to be printed.
5. From Paper Type, select the paper type to be used.
6. Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
7. Click Print in the Print dialog box to start printing.
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
1. First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page 4, then page 2.
When printing of the even pages is complete, the Data LED lights and the LCD panel shows the
following:
Printing Basics
143
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
075-921 Printer
Insert Output to Tray
Press [OK] Button to
Continue Printing
2. After the even pages are printed, pull out the paper tray and remove the paper tray cover.
See Also:
“Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
3. Remove the paper stack from the center output tray and load it into the paper tray with the blank
surface facing up.
Note:
Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them before setting them.
4. Replace the paper tray cover, insert the paper tray into the printer, and then press the
button.
Printing Basics
144
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Pages are printed in the order of page 1 (rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), and then page 5
(rear of page 6).
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
1. First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page 4, then page 2.
When printing of the even pages is complete, the Data LED lights and the LCD panel shows the
following:
075-921 Printer
Insert Output to Tray
Press [OK] Button to
Continue Printing
Printing Basics
145
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the center output tray.
Note:
Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them before setting them.
3. Load the paper stack back into the PSI, and then press the
button.
Pages are printed in order of page 1 (rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), and then page 5 (rear of
page 6).
Direct Printing Using a USB Storage Device
The Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB storage device by
operating on the operator panel.
Important:
❏ To prevent damage to your printer, DO NOT connect any device other than the USB storage device to
the front USB port of the printer.
❏ DO NOT remove the USB storage device from the front USB port until the printer is finished with
printing.
Note:
If the Service Lock setting for Print from USB is set to Password Locked, you need to enter the
four digit password to use the Print From USB Memory feature. If the Service Lock setting for Print
from USB is set to Locked, the Print From USB Memory feature is disabled and the menu is not
displayed on the LCD panel. For more information, “Service Lock” on page 302.
Printing Basics
146
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The front USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2.0 devices. You must use only an authorized
USB storage device with an A plug type connector. Use only a metal shielded USB storage device.
* A plug type
To print a file in a USB storage device:
1. Press the
(Print) button.
2. Insert a USB storage device to the front USB port of the printer.
3. Select Print From.
4. Select the desired file, and then press the
button.
5. Select printing options as needed.
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin printing.
Note:
You can print the files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature. Other files, such as
those created by a user, may not be printed properly.
Printing Basics
147
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Important:
Before removing the USB storage device, ensure that the printer is not accessing the device. Removing the
USB storage device while being accessed may destroy the data in the device or the USB storage device
itself.
Selecting Printing Options
Selecting Printing Preferences (Windows)
Printing preferences control all of your print jobs, unless you override them specifically for a job. For
example, if you want to use duplex (2-sided) printing for most jobs, set this option in printing
preferences.
1. Click start — Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP).
Click Start — Printers and Faxes (for Windows Server 2003).
Click Start — Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2).
Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers (for Windows Vista and
Windows Server 2008).
A list of available printers appears.
2. Right-click the icon for your printer, and then select Printing preferences.
The printer’s Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
3. Make selections on the driver tabs, and then click OK to save your selections.
Note:
For details on the Windows print driver options, click Help on the print driver tab to view the Help.
Selecting Options for an Individual Job (Windows)
If you want to use special printing options for a particular job, change the driver settings before
sending the job to the printer. For example, if you want to use Photo print‐quality mode for a
particular graphic, select this setting on the print driver before printing that job.
1. With the desired document or graphic open in your application, access the Print dialog box.
Printing Basics
148
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Select your printer and click Preferences to open the print driver.
3. Make selections on the driver tabs.
Note:
On Windows OS, you can save current printing options with a distinctive name and apply them to
other print jobs. Make selections on the Paper/Output, Graphics, Layout, Watermarks/Forms,
or Advanced tab, and then click Save under Favorites on the Paper/Output tab. Click Help for
more information.
4. Click OK to save your selections.
5. Print the job.
See the following table for specific printing options:
Printing Basics
149
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Printing Options for Windows
Operating System
Driver Tab
Printing Options
Windows XP, Windows XP x
64bit, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 x 64bit,
Windows Vista, Windows
Vista x 64bit, Windows Server
2008, Windows Server 2008 x
64bit, Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows 7, or Windows 7
x 64bit
Paper/Output tab
❏
Favorites
❏
Duplex
❏
Copies
❏
Collated*
❏
Paper Summary
❏
Paper Size
❏
Paper Type
❏
Feed Orientation
❏
Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator
❏
Printer Status
❏
Restore Defaults
❏
Image Quality
❏
Toner Saving Mode
❏
Image Enhancement
❏
Screen
❏
Image Settings
Graphics tab
Layout tab
❏
Apply to All Elements
❏
Apply to Selected Element
❏
Brightness
❏
Contrast
❏
Tone Balance
❏
Restore Defaults
❏
Image Orientation
❏
Multiple Up
❏
Image Order
❏
Image Border
❏
Booklet / Poster / Mixed Document
❏
Output Size
❏
Reduce / Enlarge
❏
Margin Shift/Margin
❏
Restore Defaults
Printing Basics
150
AL-MX200 Series
Operating System
Driver Tab
Printing Options
Windows XP, Windows XP x
64bit, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 x 64bit,
Windows Vista, Windows
Vista x 64bit, Windows Server
2008, Windows Server 2008 x
64bit, Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows 7, or Windows 7
x 64bit
Watermarks/Forms tab
❏
❏
Advanced tab
*
User’s Guide
Watermarks
❏
New Text
❏
New Bitmap
❏
Edit
❏
Delete
❏
First Page Only
Forms
❏
Off
❏
Create / Register Forms
❏
Image Overlay
❏
Header / Footer Options
❏
Restore Defaults
❏
Items
❏
Change All Colors to Black
❏
Resolution
❏
Show Paper Size/Type Error
❏
Font Settings
❏
Restore Defaults
Collated is not available when the settings in Watermarks/Forms tab are set on the 64-bit OS.
Selecting Options for an Individual Job (Mac OS X)
To select print settings for a particular job, change the driver settings before sending the job to the
printer.
1. With the document open in your application, click File, and then click Print.
2. Select your printer from Printer.
3. Select the desired printing options from the menus and drop-down lists that are displayed.
Note:
On Mac OS X, click Save As on the Presets menu screen to save the current printer settings. You can
create multiple presets and save each with its own distinctive name and printer settings. To print jobs
using specific printer settings, click the applicable saved preset in the Presets menu.
4. Click Print to print the job.
Mac OS X Print Driver Printing Options:
Printing Basics
151
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The table shown below uses Mac OS X 10.6 TextEdit as an example.
Printing options for Mac OS X
Item
Layout
Color Matching
Paper Handling
Cover Page
Scheduler
Printer Features
Printing Options
❏
Copies
❏
Collated
❏
Pages
❏
Paper Size
❏
Orientation
❏
Pages per Sheet
❏
Layout Direction
❏
Border
❏
Two-Sided
❏
Reverse page orientation
❏
Flip horizontally
❏
ColorSync
❏
In printer
❏
Profile
❏
Pages to Print
❏
Page Order
❏
Scale to fit paper size
❏
Destination Paper Size
❏
Scale down only
❏
Print Cover Page
❏
Cover Page Type
❏
Billing Info
❏
Print Document
❏
Priority
❏
1. Detailed Settings
❏
❏
Resolution
❏
Screen
❏
Toner Saving Mode
❏
Image Enhancement
2. Paper Handling
❏
Duplex
❏
Paper Type
❏
Show Paper Size/Type Error
Printing Basics
152
AL-MX200 Series
Item
User’s Guide
Printing Options
Summary
Printing Custom Size Paper
This section explains how to print on custom size paper using the print driver.
The way to load custom size paper is the same as the one to load standard size paper.
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
❏ “Setting Paper Sizes and Types” on page 138
Defining a Custom Paper Size
Before printing, define a custom size on the print driver.
Note:
When defining a paper size on the print driver or the operator panel, be sure to specify the same size as the
actual print media used. Specifying a wrong size for printing can cause a printer failure. This is especially
true if you specify a bigger size when using a narrow width paper.
Using the Windows Print Driver
On the Windows print driver, define a custom size in the Custom Paper Size dialog box. This section
explains the procedure using Windows 7 as an example.
On Windows XP or later, only users with administrator rights can use the administrator's password to
change the settings. Users without the rights of administrator can only view the contents.
1. Click Start — Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the icon for your printer, and then select Printer properties.
3. Select the Configuration tab.
4. Click Custom Paper Size.
5. Select the custom setup you want to define from Details.
Printing Basics
153
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Specify the length of the short edge and long edge under Change Setting For. You can specify the
values either by entering them directly or using the up arrow and down arrow buttons. The length
of the short edge cannot be longer than the long edge, even if it is within the specified range. The
length of the long edge cannot be shorter than the short edge, even if it is within the specified
range.
7. To assign a paper name, select the Name the Paper Size check box, and then enter the name in
Paper Name. Up to 14 characters can be used for the paper name.
8. If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7 to define another custom size.
9. Click OK twice.
Printing on Custom Size Paper
Use the following procedures to print using either the Windows or Mac OS X print driver.
Using the Windows Print Driver
This section explains the procedure using Windows 7 WordPad as an example.
Note:
The way to display the Printer Properties/Printing Preferences dialog box depends on the application
software. Refer to the manual of your application software.
1. From the file menu, select Print.
2. Select your printer and click Preferences.
3. Select the Paper/Output tab.
4. Select the size of the document to be printed from Paper Size.
5. Select the paper type to be used from Paper Type.
6. Click the Layout tab.
7. From Output Size, select the custom size you defined. If you have selected the custom size from
Paper Size in step 4, select Same as Paper Size.
8. Click OK.
Printing Basics
154
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
9. Click Print in the Print dialog box to start printing.
Using the Mac OS X Print Driver
This section explains the procedure using Mac OS X 10.6 TextEdit as an example.
1. From the File menu, select Page Setup.
2. Select your printer from Format For.
3. From Paper Size, select Manage Custom Sizes.
4. In the Custom Paper Sizes window, click +.
A newly created setting Untitled is displayed in the list.
5. Double-click Untitled and enter a name for the setting.
6. Enter the size of the document to be printed in the Width and Height boxes of Paper Size.
7. Specify Non-Printable Area if necessary.
8. Click OK.
9. Make sure that the newly created paper size is chosen in Paper Size, and then click OK.
10. From the File menu, select Print.
11. Click Print to start printing.
Checking Status of a Print Job
Checking Status (Windows Only)
You can check the printer status with Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor printer icon on
the taskbar at the bottom right of the screen. The Printer Selection window appears and displays the
printer name, the printer connection port, printer status, and the model name. Check the column
Status for the current status of your printer.
Settings button: Displays the Settings window and allows you to modify the Status Monitor settings.
Printing Basics
155
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Click the name of the desired printer listed on the Printer Selection window. The Printer Status
window appears. You can check the printer status and print job status.
For details on Status Monitor, see Help. The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example:
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Activate Status Monitor.
The Printer Selection window appears.
2. Click the name of the desired printer from the list.
The Printer Status window appears.
3. Click Help.
See Also:
“Status Monitor (Windows Only)” on page 35
Checking Status on EpsonNet Config (Windows & Mac OS X)
You can check the status of the print job sent to the printer on the Jobs tab of EpsonNet Config.
See Also:
“Printer Management Software” on page 33
Printing a Report Page
You can print various types of reports and lists. For details on each report and list, see “Report / List”
on page 264.
Taking the System Settings page as an example, this section describes two methods of printing a report
page.
Printing the System Settings Page
To verify detailed printer settings, print the System Settings page.
Using the Operator Panel
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
Printing Basics
156
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Report / List, and then press the
3. Select System Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
The System Settings page is printed.
Using the Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only)
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
2. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3. Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page is displayed.
4. Click the System Settings button.
The System Settings page is printed.
Printer Settings
You can change the printer settings using either the operator panel or the Printer Setting Utility.
Printing Basics
157
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Changing the Printer Settings
Using the Operator Panel
Note:
❏ Factory defaults may vary for different regions.
❏ Once one value is selected, it will be active until a new value is applied or the default value is restored.
❏ Driver settings may have precedence over the changes previously made and you may have to change
the printer settings.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select the desired menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select the desired menu or menu item, and then press the
button.
❏ If the selection is a menu, the menu opens and the list of menu items appears.
❏ If the selection is a menu item, the default menu setting appears.
A value can be:
❏ A phrase or word to describe a setting
❏ A numerical value that can be changed
❏ An On or Off setting
4. Repeat step 3 until you reach the desired value.
5. Press the
button to apply the selected value.
6. To continue changing the printer settings, use the (Back) button to ascend the operator panel
menus to one of the top menus and follow steps 2 through 5.
To quit changing the printer settings, keep pressing the
shows Select Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel
Using the Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only)
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Printing Basics
158
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
❏ Once one value is selected, it will be active until a new value is applied or the default value is restored.
❏ Driver settings may have precedence over the changes previously made and you may have to change
the printer settings.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
2. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3. Select the desired menu item.
Each menu item has a list of values. A value can be:
❏ A phrase or word to describe a setting
❏ A numerical value that can be changed
❏ An On or Off setting
4. Select the desired value, and then click the Apply New Settings or Restart printer to apply new
settings button.
Printing with the Web Services on Devices
This section provides information for network printing with the Web Services on Devices available on
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows 7 protocol of
Microsoft.
Adding Roles of Print Services
When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need to add the roles of print
services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client.
Printing Basics
159
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
For Windows Server 2008:
1. Click Start — Administrative Tools — Server Manager.
2. From the Action menu, select Add Roles.
3. Select the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and
then click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Select the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6. Click Install.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1. Click Start — Administrative Tools — Server Manager.
2. From the Action menu, select Add Roles.
3. Select the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add
Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Select the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6. Click Install.
Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using the Software Disc that shipped with your
printer, or using the Add Printer wizard.
Installing a Print Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
1. Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers (Start — Devices and
Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
Printing Basics
160
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4. In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
Note:
❏ In the list of available printers, the Web Services on Devices printer is displayed in the form of
“http://IP address/ws/”.
❏ If no Web Services on Devices printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address
manually to create a Web Services on Devices printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually,
follow the instructions below. For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a Web Services on Devices
printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.
❏ Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or
Windows 7, perform one of the followings:
- Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.
- Add the print driver to your computer in advance.
5. If prompted, install the print driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator
password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
6. Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
7. Print a test page to verify print installation.
a Click Start — Control Panel — Hardware and Sound — Printers (Start — Devices and
Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
b Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties (Printer properties for
Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
c On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page is printed successfully,
installation is complete.
Printing Basics
161
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 6
Copying
Loading Paper for Copying
Note:
If the Service Lock setting for Copy is set to Password Locked, you need to enter the four digit
password to use the copy function. If the Service Lock setting is set to Locked, the copy function is
disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel. For more information, see “Service Lock” on
page 302.
The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or
copying.
See Also:
❏ “Usable Print Media” on page 119
❏ “Loading Print Media” on page 122
Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) to load a source document
for copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can load up to 50 sheets of 64 gsm documents for one job
using the ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.
Important:
❏ Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 148.0 × 210.0 mm (5.83 × 8.27 inch) or larger than
215.9 × 355.6 mm (8.5 × 14 inch), different sizes or weights together, booklets, pamphlets,
transparencies, or documents having other unusual characteristics in ADF.
❏ Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased
paper, curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF.
❏ Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials
such as glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.
Note:
To ensure the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of
the ADF.
Copying
162
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Making Copies From the Document Glass
Note:
❏ A computer connection is not required for copying.
❏ Ensure that no document is on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). If any document is detected
on the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.
❏ Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy printout. For best results,
clean the document glass before use. For more information, see “Cleaning the Scanner” on
page 380.
To make a copy from the document glass:
1. Open the document cover.
2. Place a single document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide
on the top left corner of the document glass.
Copying
163
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
! Caution:
Do not apply excessive force to hold a thick document on the document glass. It may break the
glass and cause injuries.
3. Close the document cover.
Note:
❏ Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the
toner consumption.
❏ If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are
caught by the stopper, and then close the document cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than
20 mm, start copying with the document cover open.
4. Press the
(Copy) button.
5. Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, and image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
To clear the settings, use the
6. Press the
Note:
Press the
(Clear All) button.
(Start) button to begin copying.
(Stop) button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document.
Copying
164
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Important:
Do not load more than 50 sheets on the ADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document
output tray. The document output tray should be emptied before it holds more than 50 sheets or your
source documents may be damaged.
Note:
❏ To ensure the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass
instead of the ADF.
❏ A computer connection is not required for copying.
❏ You cannot load the following documents on the ADF. Be sure to place them on the document glass.
Curled documents
Pre-punched paper
Lightweight documents
Folded, creased or torn documents
Cut and paste documents
Carbon paper
To make a copy from the ADF:
1. Load up to 50 sheets of 64 gsm documents face up on the ADF with the top edge going in first. Then
adjust the document guides to the correct document size.
Note:
Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size document.
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
Copying
165
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, and image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
To clear the settings, use the
4. Press the
Note:
Press the
(Clear All) button.
(Start) button to begin copying.
(Stop) button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document.
Customizing Copy Options
You can customize the following options for the current copy job before pressing the
button to make copies.
(Start)
Note:
After a copy job is completed, the copy options would be kept until the LCD panel shows Select
Function (auto-reset or the (Back) button is pressed), the (Clear All) button is pressed, or the
(Copy) button is pressed again.
Number of Copies
You can specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad.
4. If necessary, customize other copy options including the copy size, and image quality.
Copying
166
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
5. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Original Size
You can specify the default document size.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Document Size, and then press the
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
button.
button.
A4 - 210x297mm*
A5 - 148x210mm
B5 - 182x257mm
Letter - 8.5x11"
Folio - 8.5x13"
Legal - 8.5x14"
Executive
*
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, and image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Copying
167
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Output Paper Size
You can specify the output paper size.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Output Paper Size, and then press the
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
button.
button.
Note:
To change the default Output Paper Size settings, change the Paper Size settings of Paper
Tray under Tray Settings.
A4 - 210x297mm*
A5 - 148x210mm
B5 - 182x257mm
Letter - 8.5x11"
Folio - 8.5x13"
Legal - 8.5x14"
Executive
Statement
#10 Env. - 4.125x9.5"
Monarch Env.
Monarch Env. L
DL Env. - 110x220mm
DL Env. L
Copying
168
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
C5 Env. - 162x229mm
Postcard JPN - 148x100mm
W-Postcard JPN - 148x200mm
Env Yougata 2
Env Yougata 2L
Env Yougata 3
Env Yougata 3L
Env Yougata 4
Env Yougata 6
Env Younaga 3
Env Nagagata 3
Env Nagagata 4
Env Kakugata 3
New Custom Size
Portrait(Y)
297mm*/11.7inch*
127mm - 355mm/5.0inch - 14.0inch
Landscape(X)
210mm*/8.3inch*
77mm - 215mm/3.0inch - 8.5inch
*
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, and image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Reduce/Enlarge
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25% to 400%.
Note:
❏ When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.
Copying
169
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ This item is available only when Multiple Up is set to Off or Manual.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Reduce/Enlarge, and then press the
4. Select the desired settings, and then press the
button.
button.
mm system
200%
A5->A4(141%)
A5->B5(122%)
100%*
B5->A5(81%)
A4->A5(70%)
50%
*
Factory default menu setting
inch system
200%
Stmt->Lgl(154%)
Stmt->Ltr(129%)
100%*
Lgl->Ltr (78%)
Ldgr->Ltr(64%)
Copying
170
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
50%
*
Factory default menu setting
Note:
You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press the
or the button to enlarge or reduce the zoom ratio by1%. See the following table for specific zoom
ratios.
Copy
Source
A5
B5
A4
A5
100%
122%
141%
B5
81%
100%
115%
A4
70%
86%
100%
The methods to load print media vary depending on the size and orientation of the print media.
For more information, refer to “Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123 or “Loading
Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132.
For print media that can be loaded, refer to “Usable Print Media” on page 119.
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, and image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Collated
You can sort the copy output. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one
complete three page document will print followed by the second complete document.
Copying
171
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available memory. If a memory shortage
occurs, cancel the collating by turning Collated to Off on the operator panel.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Collated, and then press the
button.
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
*
button.
Off*
Does not copy documents in the collated order.
On
Copies documents in the collated order.
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Document Type
You can select the copy image quality.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
Copying
172
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Document Type, and then press the
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
*
button.
button.
Text
Suitable for documents with text.
Mixed*
Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.
Photo
Suitable for documents with photos.
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, and copy size.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Lighten/Darken
You can adjust the copy density level to make the copy lighter or darker than the source document.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Lighten/Darken, and then press the
button.
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
button.
Copying
173
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Makes the copy lighter than the source document. Works well with dark print.
Lighten2
Lighten1
Normal*
Works well with standard type or printed documents.
Darken1
Makes the copy darker than the source document. Works well with light print
or faint pencil markings.
Darken2
*
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Sharpness
You can adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the source document.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Sharpness, and then press the
button.
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
Sharpest
button.
Makes the copy sharper than the source document.
Sharper
Normal*
Keeps the sharpness of the source document as it is.
Copying
174
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Makes the copy softer than the source document.
Softer
Softest
*
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Auto Exposure
You can suppress the background of the source document to enhance text on the copy.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Auto Exposure, and then press the
4. Select On, and then press the
button.
button.
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Copying
175
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2-Sided
You can make duplex (2-sided) copies with the specified binding position.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select 2-Sided, and then press the
button.
4. Select the desired binding position, and then press the
*
button.
1->1-Sided*
Makes regular single-sided copies.
Flip on Long Edge
Makes duplex (2-sided) copies ready to be bound on the long edge.
Flip on Short Edge
Makes duplex (2-sided) copies ready to be bound on the short edge.
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Multiple Up
You can print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Copying
176
AL-MX200 Series
Auto:
ID Card Copy:
Manual:
Automatically reduces the
size of the source
documents to print all of
them on a single sheet of
paper.
Prints both sides of the ID
card on a single sheet of
paper in the original size.
Reduces the size of the
source documents
according to the Reduce/
Enlarge setting and print all
of them on a single sheet of
paper.
User’s Guide
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Multiple Up, and then press the
button.
Copying
177
AL-MX200 Series
4. Select the desired setting, and then press the
*
User’s Guide
button.
Off*
Makes regular one-to-one copies of the source documents.
Auto
Automatically reduces the size of the source documents to print all of them
on a single sheet of paper.
ID Card Copy
Prints both sides of the ID card on a single sheet of paper in the original
size.
Manual
Reduces the size of the source documents according to the Reduce/
Enlarge setting and print all of them on a single sheet of paper.
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size (only for Off
or Manual), and image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
When you are using the document glass and Multiple Up is set to Auto, ID Card Copy, or
Manual, the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page. Select Yes or No, and then press the
button.
If you have selected Yes, select Continue or Cancel, and then press the
button.
Margin Top/Bottom
You can specify the top and bottom margins of the copy.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Margin Top/Bottom, and then press the
button.
Copying
178
AL-MX200 Series
4. Press the or
button.
button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
4mm*/0.2inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
User’s Guide
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default
menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under
the System Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more
information.
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Margin Left/Right
You can specify the left and right margins of the copy.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Margin Left/Right, and then press the
4. Press the or
button.
button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
4mm*/0.2inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
button.
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default
menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under
the System Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more
information.
Factory default menu setting
Copying
179
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Margin Middle
You can specify the middle margin of the copy.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Margin Middle, and then press the
4. Press the or
button.
button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
0mm*/0.0inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
button.
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default
menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under
the System Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more
information.
Factory default menu setting
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the number of copies, copy size, and image
quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
Copying
180
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Copying an ID Card
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by
selecting ID Card Copy on the operator panel.
Note:
If the Service Lock setting for Copy is set to Password Locked, you need to enter the four digit
password to use the copy function. If the Service Lock setting for Copy is set to Locked, the copy
function is disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel. For more information, see “Service
Lock” on page 302.
1. Place the front side of an ID card face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
“Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Copy) button.
3. Select Multiple Up, and then press the
button.
4. Select ID Card Copy, and then press the
button.
5. If necessary, customize other copy options including the image quality.
See Also:
“Customizing Copy Options” on page 166
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin copying.
When the scanning completes, the LCD panel prompts you for another page. Select Yes or No, and
then press the
button.
7. Turn over the ID card and press the
(Start) button to begin copying the other side.
Changing the Default Copy Settings
You can customize the default copy settings using the menu items that you use most frequently.
1. Press the System button.
Copying
181
AL-MX200 Series
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
3. Select Copy Defaults, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
button.
4. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, as needed.
7. To quit changing the default settings, keep pressing the
shows Select Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel
Copying
182
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 7
Scanning
Scanning Overview
Note:
If the Service Lock setting for Scan is set to Password Locked, you need to enter the four digit
password to use the scan function. If the Service Lock setting is set to Locked, the scan function is
disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel. For more information, see “Service Lock” on
page 302.
You can use your printer to turn pictures and text into editable images on your computer.
The resolution setting for scanning depends on the scan source type and how you plan to use the
scanned image or document on your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.
Scan Source Type
Resolution
Documents
300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text
400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures
100-200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer
150-300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer
300-600 dpi
Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If
you require a resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of
the image by previewing (or pre-scanning) and cropping before scanning the image.
Scanning to a USB Connected Computer
You can connect your printer to a computer with a USB cable and use the printer as a scanner.
Using the Operator Panel
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Scanning
183
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
❏ Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer with a USB cable.
❏ You must use the Express Scan Manager on your computer to specify the location to send scanned
image files.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Scan) button.
3. Select Scan to Computer(USB), and then press the
button.
4. If necessary, customize scan options.
5. Press the
(Start) button.
A scanned image file is generated.
Note:
If a dialog box to select a program appears on your computer, select Express Scan Manager-Btype,
and then click OK. Once you select the Always use this program for this action check box when
selecting Express Scan Manager-Btype, the selected application is automatically used without
displaying the program selection window.
See Also:
“Express Scan Manager” on page 37
Using the TWAIN Driver
Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN) driver for scanning images.
TWAIN is one of the standard components provided with Microsoft Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista , Windows 7, and
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, and works with various scanners. The following procedure uses Windows 7 as
an example.
®
®
®
®
®
Scanning
184
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
❏ Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer with a USB cable.
❏ When using the printer as a network printer, you can also scan document(s) via a network instead of
using the USB cable.
The following procedure to scan an image uses the Microsoft Clip Organizer on Windows 7 as an
example.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Click Start — All Programs — Microsoft Office — Microsoft Office 2010 Tools — Microsoft
Clip Organizer.
3. Click File — Add Clips to Organizer — From Scanner or Camera.
4. In the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera dialog box, under Device, select your TWAIN
device.
5. Click Custom Insert.
6. Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview image.
Scanning
185
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
Preview is grayed out and disabled when you select Document Feeder Tray from Scan From.
7. Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options tabs.
8. Click Scan to start scanning.
A scanned image file is generated.
Using the WIA Driver
Your printer also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is
one of the standard components provided with Windows XP and later operating systems and works
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an
image and easily manipulate it without using additional software.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Note:
Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
Scanning
186
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Start the drawing software, such as the Paint.
Note:
On Windows Vista, use the Windows Photo Gallery instead of the Paint.
3. Click the Paint button — From scanner or camera.
The WIA window appears.
4. Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display
the Advanced Properties dialog box.
5. Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK.
6. Click Scan to start scanning.
7. Click the Paint button — Save as.
8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
Using a Scanner on the Network
You can connect your printer to a network and use the Scan to Network feature of the computer for
scanning.
Scanning
187
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Overview
The Scan to Server/Scan to Computer feature allows you to scan documents on the printer and send
the scanned documents to a network computer using the FTP or SMB protocol.
When using the FTP protocol, you need to select a server and specify a destination to store scanned
document using EpsonNet Config or Address Book Editor.
The following is required to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
❏ Using the SMB
Your computer must run on one of the following operating systems and have the folder sharing
enabled.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
❏ Windows Server 2003
❏ Windows Server 2008
❏ Windows Server 2008 R2
❏ Windows XP
❏ Windows Vista
❏ Windows 7
❏ Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7
Scanning
188
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Using the FTP
One of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server (login name and password) are
required.
❏ Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0
❏ Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0/4.0 or Internet Information Services
5.0/5.1
❏ Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.5.8 - 10.6, 10.7
For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system administrator.
Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Network feature.
“Confirming the Login name and the Password” on page 190
“Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents” on
page 192
“Configuring the Printer” on page 203
“Sending the Scanned File to the Network” on page 210
Scanning
189
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Confirming the Login name and the Password
When Using the SMB
The Scan to Server/Scan to Computer feature requires a user login account with a valid and
non-empty password for authentication. Confirm the login user name and the password.
If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password for your user login
account with the following procedure.
For Windows XP:
1. Click start — Control Panel — User Accounts.
2. Click Change an account.
3. Select your account.
4. Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2003:
1. Click Start — Administrative Tools — Computer Management.
2. Click Local Users and Groups.
Scanning
190
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Double-click Users.
4. Right-click your account, and then select Set Password.
Note:
When an alert message appears, confirm the message and then click Proceed.
5. Add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Vista and Windows 7:
1. Click Start — Control Panel.
2. Click User Accounts and Family Safety.
3. Click User Accounts.
4. Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2:
1. Click Start — Control Panel.
2. Click User Accounts.
3. Click User Accounts.
4. Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7
1. Click System Preferences — Accounts.
2. Select your account.
3. Select Change Password.
4. Enter a password for your user login account in New Password (New password for Mac OS X
10.6).
5. Re-enter the password in Verify.
6. Click Change Password.
Scanning
191
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to “Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned
Documents” on page 192.
When Using the FTP
The Scan to Server/Scan to Computer feature requires a user name and a password. For your user
name and password, contact your system administrator.
Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents
When Using the SMB
Set up a shared folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.
For Windows XP Home Edition:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2. Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
3. Click the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.
4. Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
Scanning
192
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
❏ Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.
Scanning
193
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ When the following screen appears, click If you understand the security risks but want to
share files without running the wizard, click here, then select Just enable file sharing, and
then click OK.
5. Select Allow network users to change my files.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK.
Note:
To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory
When you are finished with creating the shared folder, go to “Configuring the Printer” on
page 203.
Scanning
194
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
For Windows XP Professional Edition:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare)
and double-click the folder.
2. Select Folder Options from Tools.
3. Click View tab, and then deselect the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check box.
4. Click OK, and then close the window.
5. Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
6. Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.
7. Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
Scanning
195
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.
8. Click Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
9. Click Add.
10. Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in the Enter the
object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name,
MySelf).
Note:
Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
Scanning
196
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
11. Click OK.
12. Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full Control check box. This will
grant you permission to send the document into this folder.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Apply, and then click OK.
Note:
To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
When you are finished with creating the shared folder, go to “Configuring the Printer” on
page 203.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2. Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
3. Click the Sharing tab, and then select the Share this folder.
Scanning
197
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
Note:
Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
5. Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder.
6. Click Add.
7. Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in the Enter the
object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name,
MySelf).
Scanning
198
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
8. Click OK.
9. Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full Control check box. This will
grant you permission to send the document to this folder.
10. Click OK.
11. Specify other settings as necessary, and then click Apply and click OK.
Scanning
199
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
When you are finished with creating the shared folder, go to “Configuring the Printer” on
page 203.
For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2. Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
3. Click the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.
For Windows Vista, when User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
4. Select the Share this folder check box.
5. Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
Scanning
200
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
6. Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder.
7. Click Add.
8. Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in the Enter the
object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name,
MySelf).
Note:
Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
9. Click OK.
Scanning
201
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
10. Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full Control check box. This will
grant you permission to send the document to this folder.
11. Click OK.
12. Click OK to exit the Advanced Sharing dialog box.
13. Click Close.
Note:
To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
When you are finished with creating the shared folder, go to “Configuring the Printer” on
page 203.
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
Note:
Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
2. Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.
Scanning
202
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Select the Shared folder (Shared Folder for Mac OS X 10.5) check box.
4. Open Sharing & Permissions.
5. Click the plus (+) sign.
6. Specify an account you want to share, and then click Select.
7. Set the Privilege of the account to Read & Write.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 as needed, and then close the window.
9. Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
10. Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
11. Select the Share files and folders using SMB (Share files and folders using SMB (Windows)
for Mac OS X 10.5) check box and your account name.
12. Enter your account password, and then click OK.
13. Click Done.
When Using the FTP
Set up a destination to store the scanned document using the EpsonNet Config. To set up a destination
using EpsonNet Config, see “Using EpsonNet Config” on page 203
Configuring the Printer
You can configure the printer to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature with EpsonNet Config or
Address Book Editor.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Using EpsonNet Config
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
Scanning
203
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
Note:
For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see “Verifying the IP Settings” on
page 47.
3. Click the Address Book tab.
If a user name and password entry is prompted, enter the correct user name and password.
Note:
The default User ID and password are both blank (NULL).
4. Under Network Scan (Comp./Serv.), click Computer/Server Address Book.
Scanning
204
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. Select any unused number and click Add.
The Add Network Scan Address page appears.
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1
Name (Displayed on
Printer)
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Address Book.
Scanning
205
AL-MX200 Series
2
Network Type
User’s Guide
Select Server FTP to use a FTP server.
Select Computer SMB to store scanned documents in a shared folder on your
computer.
3
Host Address (IP Address or
DNS Name)
Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server or your computer.
The following are examples:
❏
For Server FTP:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.168.1.100
❏
For Computer SMB:
Server name: myhost
IP address: 192.168.1.100
4
Port Number
Enter the server port number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value
of 21 for FTP and 139 for SMB.
5
Login Name (if required by
host)
Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your
computer or the FTP server.
6
Login Password
Enter the password for the above login name.
Note:
You cannot use an empty password for the Scan to Computer feature. Ensure
that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See “Confirming the
Login name and the Password” on page 190 for details on how to add a
password for your user login account.)
7
Re-enter Password
Re-enter your password.
8
Name of Shared Directory
For Computer SMB only.
Enter the name of the shared folder on your computer where you want to store
scanned documents.
Scanning
206
AL-MX200 Series
9
Subdirectory Path
(optional)
User’s Guide
For Computer SMB
To store scanned documents simply in the shared folder specified for Name of
Shared Directory, leave this box blank.
To store scanned documents in a subfolder within the shared folder, enter the
path to the subfolder as shown in the example below.
Example: Shared folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\Mypic\John in your directory.
In this case, enter for Subdirectory Path (optional) as follows:
\MyPic\John
For Server FTP
Enter the path to the FTP server where you want to store scanned documents.
When you are finished with printer configuration, go to “Sending the Scanned File to the Network” on
page 210.
Using the Address Book Editor
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Address Book Editor.
Note:
❏ The window to select a device appears when multiple fax drivers are installed on your computer.
In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Device Name.
❏ The Enter Password window appears when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and click OK.
2. Click OK on the “Retrieval Successful” message window.
Scanning
207
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Click Tool — New (Device Address Book) — Server.
The Server Address dialog box appears.
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1
Name
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Address Book.
2
Server Type
Select Computer to store scanned documents in a shared folder on your
computer.
Select Server to use a FTP server.
3
Computer Settings Wizard
For Computer only.
Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides you through several
steps.
When you complete the steps in the wizard, the settings for Server Address are
automatically configured. For more information, click the Help button.
Scanning
208
AL-MX200 Series
4
Server Name/IP Address
User’s Guide
Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server or your computer.
The following are examples:
❏
For Computer:
Server name: myhost
IP address: 192.168.1.100
❏
For Server:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.168.1.100
5
Share Name
For Computer only.
Enter the name of the shared folder on your computer.
6
Path
For Computer
To store scanned documents simply in the shared folder specified for Share
Name, leave this box blank.
To store scanned documents in a subfolder within the shared folder, enter the
path to the subfolder as shown in the example below.
Example: Shared folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
In this case, enter for Path as follows:
\MyPic\John
For Server
Enter the path to the FTP server where you want to store scanned documents.
7
Login Name
Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your
computer or the FTP server.
8
Login Password
Enter the password for the above login name.
Note:
You cannot use an empty password for the Scan to Server/Scan to Computer
feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See
“Confirming the Login name and the Password” on page 190 for details on how
to add a password for your user login account).
Scanning
209
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
9
Confirm Login Password
Re-enter your password.
10
Port Number
Enter the port number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139
for SMB and 21 for FTP.
When you are finished with printer configuration, go to “Sending the Scanned File to the Network” on
page 210.
Sending the Scanned File to the Network
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Scan) button.
3. Select Scan to Network, and then press the
4. Select Scan to, and then press the
button.
button.
5. Select Computer(Network), Server(FTP), or Search Address Book, and then press the
button.
Computer(Network): Stores scanned documents on the computer using the SMB protocol.
Server(FTP): Stores scanned documents on the server using the FTP protocol.
Search Address Book: Select the server address registered in the Address Book.
6. Select a destination to store the scanned documents, and then press the
button.
7. If necessary, customize scan options.
8. Press the
(Start) button to send a file containing the scanned document(s).
Scanning
210
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Scanning to a USB Storage Device
The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB
storage device. To scan documents and save them, follow the steps below:
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Insert a USB storage device into the front USB port on your printer.
USB Memory appears.
3. Select Scan to, and then press the
button.
4. Select Save to USB Drive or a folder to save a file, and then press the
button.
5. Select scanning options as required.
6. Press the
(Start) button.
When the scan is complete, the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page. Select No or Yes,
and then press the
button.
If you have selected Yes, select Continue or Cancel, and then press the
button.
Scanning
211
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image
When sending an e-mail with the scanned image from your printer, it would be easier if you had an
address book. You can create this address book with EpsonNet Config. See “Adding an Entry to the
Address Book” on page 212 for more information.
Adding an Entry to the Address Book
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
Note:
For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see “Verifying the IP Settings” on
page 47.
3. Click the Address Book tab.
If a user name and password entry is prompted, enter the correct user name and password.
Note:
The default User ID and password are both blank (NULL).
Scanning
212
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Under Fax / E-mail, click Personal Address.
5. Select any unused number and click Add.
The Add Personal Address page appears.
Scanning
213
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Enter a name, a phone number, and an e-mail address in the Name, Phone Number and E-mail
Address fields.
7. Click the Apply button.
Configuring an SMTP Server
To use the Scan to E-Mail feature, you first need to set up your SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
server information. SMTP is a protocol for sending e-mail.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
Note:
For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see “Verifying the IP Settings” on
page 47.
3. Click the Properties tab.
Scanning
214
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Click Port Status.
5. Ensure that the Enabled check box for SNMP is selected.
6. Under Protocol Settings, click E-mail.
7. Enter your e-mail settings, and then click Apply.
Scanning
215
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
❏ Depending on your environment, you may also need to set Send Authentication.
❏ See your system administrator to obtain your e-mail settings if necessary.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
❏ “Making Copies From the Document Glass” on page 163
2. Press the
(Scan) button.
3. Select Scan to E-Mail, and then press the
4. Select E-Mail to, and then press the
button.
button.
5. Select the setting listed below, and then press the
button.
Keypad: Enter the e-mail address directly and then press the
button.
Address Book: Select the e-mail address registered in the E-mail Address Book, and then press
the
button.
E-Mail Group: Select the e-mail group registered in the E-mail Groups, and then press the
button.
Search Address Book: Enter a text to search from the E-mail Address Book, and then press the
button. Select the e-mail address from the list, and then press the
button.
Note:
E-mail recipients need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel.
6. Select scanning options as required.
7. Press the
(Start) button to send e-mail.
Scanning
216
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Customizing Scan Options
Changing the Default Scan Settings
For a complete list of all of the default settings, see “Defaults Settings” on page 305.
Setting the Scanned Image File Type
To specify the file type of the scanned image:
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
3. Select Scan Defaults, and then press the
4. Select File Format, and then press the
5. Select the type, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
Available types:
❏ PDF (factory default setting)
❏ MultiPageTIFF
❏ TIFF
❏ JPEG
Setting the Color Mode
You can scan an image in color or in black and white. Selecting black and white significantly reduces
the file size of scanned images. An image scanned in color will have a larger file size than the same
image scanned in black and white.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
3. Select Scan Defaults, and then press the
button.
button.
Scanning
217
AL-MX200 Series
4. Select Color, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
5. Select one of the following options, and then press the
button.
❏ Black & White: Scans in black and white. This option is available only when File Format is
set to PDF.
❏ Grayscale: Scans in grayscale.
❏ Color: Scans in color. (factory default setting)
❏ Color(Photo): Scans in color. This option is suitable for photographic images.
Setting the Scan Resolution
You may want to change the scan resolution depending on the way you plan to use the scanned image.
Scan resolution affects both the size and image quality of the scanned image file. The higher the scan
resolution is, the larger the file size becomes.
To select the scan resolution:
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
3. Select Scan Defaults, and then press the
4. Select Resolution, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
5. Select one of the following options, and then press the
button:
❏ 200 x 200dpi: Produces the lowest resolution and smallest file size. (factory default setting)
❏ 300 x 300dpi: Produces a medium resolution and a medium file size.
❏ 400 x 400dpi: Produces a high resolution and a large file size.
❏ 600 x 600dpi: Produces the highest resolution and largest file size.
Setting the Document Size
To specify the size of a source document:
1. Press the System button.
Scanning
218
AL-MX200 Series
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
3. Select Scan Defaults, and then press the
button.
4. Select Document Size, and then press the
button.
5. Select a paper size to specify the scan area, and then press the
button.
The factory default setting is A4 - 210x297mm.
Automatically Suppressing Background Variations
When scanning documents with a dark background such as newspapers, the printer automatically can
detect the background and whiten it when outputting the image.
To turn on/off automatic suppression:
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
button.
3. Select Scan Defaults, and then press the
button.
4. Select Auto Exposure, and then press the
button.
5. Select either On or Off, and then press the
button.
The factory default setting is On.
Changing the Scan Settings for an Individual Job
Scanning to a Computer
To temporarily change a scan setting when scanning to a computer:
1. Press the
(Scan) button.
2. Select a destination to store the scanned image, and then press the
3. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
button.
Scanning
219
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, as needed.
6. Press the
(Start) button to begin scanning.
Emailing the Scanned Image
To temporarily change a scan setting when emailing the scanned image:
1. Press the
(Scan) button.
2. Select Scan to E-Mail, and then press the
button.
3. Select an e-mail recipient, and then press the
button.
4. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, as needed.
7. Press the
(Start) button to begin scanning.
Scanning
220
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 8
Faxing
Connecting the Telephone Line
Note:
❏ If the Service Lock setting for FAX is set to Password Locked, you need to enter the four digit
password to use the fax function. If the Service Lock setting is set to Locked, the fax function is
disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel. For more information, see “Service Lock”
on page 302.
❏ Do not connect your printer directly to a DSL (digital subscriber line). This may damage the printer.
To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the
DSL filter.
1. Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the other end to an active wall
jack.
1
Wall jack connector
2
To the wall jack
Note:
The supplied telephone cord has four-contact plugs. It is recommended you use a telephone cord with
four-contact plugs and a wall jack with four contacts for a telephone line connection.
Faxing
221
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the telephone or
answering machine line cord into the phone connector ( ).
1
Phone connector
2
To an external telephone or an answering machine
Configuring Fax Initial Settings
Setting Your Region
You need to set the region where your printer is used for using the fax service on the printer.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
4. Select Region, and then press the
button.
button.
5. Select the locale of the printer, and then press the
button.
6. When the LCD panel shows Restart System, select Yes, and then press the
button.
The printer restarts to apply the setting.
Faxing
222
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
Changing the Region setting initializes all the information specified for your printer.
Setting the Printer ID
You may be required to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID, containing your
fax number and your name or company name will be printed at the top of each page sent from your
printer.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
4. Select Your Fax Number, and then press the
button.
button.
5. Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad.
Note:
If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the C (Clear) button to delete the last digit.
6. Confirm the number on the LCD panel is correct, and then press the
7. Select Company Name, and then press the
button.
button.
8. Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.
You can enter special symbols by pressing the 1, *, and # buttons as well as alphanumeric
characters.
For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see “Using the
Numeric Keypad” on page 327.
9. Confirm the name on the LCD panel is correct, and then press the
10. Press the
button.
(Back) button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function.
Faxing
223
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Setting the Time and Date
Note:
It may be necessary to reset the time and date in case of power loss.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select System Settings, and then press the
4. Select Clock Settings, and then press the
5. Select Set Date, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
6. Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or select the correct date.
Note:
If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the
button to re-enter the digit.
7. Confirm the date on the LCD panel is correct, and then press the
8. Select Set Time, and then press the
button.
button.
9. Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or select the correct time.
10. Confirm the time on the LCD panel is correct, and then press the
11. Press the
button.
(Back) button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function.
Changing the Clock Mode
You can set the current time in either the 12-hour or 24-hour format.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select System Settings, and then press the
4. Select Clock Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
Faxing
224
AL-MX200 Series
5. Select Time Format, and then press the
6. Select the desired format, and then press the
7. Press the
User’s Guide
button.
button.
(Back) button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function.
Sending a Fax
You can fax data from your printer.
Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Important:
Do not load more than 50 sheets on the ADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document
output tray. The document output tray should be emptied before it holds more than 50 sheets or your
source documents may be damaged.
Note:
❏ To ensure the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the
ADF.
❏ You cannot load the following documents on the ADF. Be sure to place them on the document glass.
Curled documents
Pre-punched paper
Lightweight documents
Folded, creased or torn documents
Cut and paste documents
Carbon paper
Faxing
225
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
1. Load a document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge going in first. Then adjust the document
guides to the correct document size.
2. Adjust the document resolution, referring to “Resolution” on page 227.
Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass
1. Open the document cover.
2. Place a single document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide
on the top left corner of the document glass.
Faxing
226
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
! Caution:
Do not apply excessive force to hold a thick document on the document glass. It may break the
glass and cause injuries.
3. Adjust the document resolution, referring to “Resolution” on page 227.
4. Close the document cover.
Note:
❏ Ensure that no document is on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). If any document is detected
on the ADF, it will take priority over the document on the document glass.
❏ If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are caught
by the stopper and then close the document cover. In case the book or magazine is thicker than 20
mm, start faxing with the document cover open.
Resolution
You can specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
1. Press the
(Fax) button.
2. Select Resolution, and then press the
button.
3. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
Standard*
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed with a dot-matrix printer.
Faxing
227
AL-MX200 Series
*
User’s Guide
SuperFine(203dpi)
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine details. The
SuperFine(203dpi) mode is effective only when the remote fax machine
supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.
SuperFine(406dpi)
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
Faxes scanned and transmitted in the SuperFine(203dpi) mode are received at the highest resolution of
the remote machine.
Document Type
You can select the default document type for the current fax job.
1. Press the
(Fax) button.
2. Select Document Type, and then press the
3. Select the desired setting, and then press the
*
button.
button.
Text*
Suitable for documents with text.
Photo
Suitable for documents with photos.
Factory default menu setting
Lighten/Darken
you can adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the source document.
1. Press the
(Fax) button.
2. Select Lighten/Darken, and then press the
button.
3. Select the desired setting, and then press the
button.
Lighten2
Makes the fax lighter than the source document. Works well with dark print.
Lighten1
Normal*
Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents.
Faxing
228
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Makes the fax darker than the source document. Works well with light print or
faint pencil markings.
Darken1
Darken2
*
Factory default menu setting
Inserting a Pause
On some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A
pause must be entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9
and then press the Redial/Pause button before entering the telephone number. “-” appears on the
LCD panel to indicate that a pause is entered.
Sending a Fax from Memory
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 225
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass” on page 226
2. Press the
(Fax) button.
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs.
See Also:
❏ “Resolution” on page 227
❏ “Lighten/Darken” on page 228
4. Select a fax number in one of the following ways:
❏ Select Fax to, and then press the
button. Select Keypad, and then press the
button.
Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
❏ Press the one-touch button, and then press the
button.
❏ Press the Address Book button, select All Entries, Group Dial, or Search using the
button, and then press the
button.
Faxing
229
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
All Entries
Displays a list of registered fax numbers. Press the
recipients, and then press the
button.
Group Dial
Press the
Search
Enter the text you want to search a fax number in the Address Book, and then
button. Press the button to select the recipients, and then press
press the
button.
the
button to select the
button to select the recipients, and then press the
❏ Press the Redial/Pause button to redial, and then press the
button.
button.
❏ Press the Speed Dial button. Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the
numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
Note:
Before you use the one-touch button, you need to register a number for any speed dial from 01 to 08.
For details on how to store the number, see “Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing Using the
Operator Panel” on page 242.
5. Press the
(Start) button to scan and store the document in the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page. If you
have more pages to send, select Yes, replace the page with a new one and select Continue, repeat
the actions for the remaining pages, and then press the
button. Otherwise, select No and press
the
button.
The printer dials the fax number and send the fax when the remote fax machine answers.
Note:
You can cancel your fax job at any time by pressing the
progress.
(Stop) button while the transmission is in
Sending a Fax Manually
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 225
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass” on page 226
2. Press the
(Fax) button.
Faxing
230
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs.
See Also:
❏ “Resolution” on page 227
❏ “Lighten/Darken” on page 228
4. Select OnHook, and then press the
5. Select On, and then press the
button.
button.
6. Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad.
7. Start the fax transmission.
❏ If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the
(Start) button.
❏ If the document is loaded on the document glass, press the
setting, and then press the
button.
Note:
You can cancel your fax job at any time by pressing the
progress.
(Start) button, select the desired
(Stop) button while the transmission is in
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to
standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the LCD panel.
If you receive an error message, press the
again.
button to clear the message and try sending the document
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission.
See Also:
“Printing a Report” on page 262
Faxing
231
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will
automatically redial the number every minute for the number of times set in the redial settings.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see “Redial Delay” on
page 285 and “Number of Redial” on page 285.
Note:
If you manually enter a fax number, the printer will not automatically redial the number.
Sending a Delayed Fax
You can use the Delayed Start mode to save scanned documents and transmit them at the specified
time to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 225
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass” on page 226
2. Press the
(Fax) button.
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs.
See Also:
❏ “Resolution” on page 227
❏ “Lighten/Darken” on page 228
4. Select Delayed Start, and then press the
5. Select On, and then press the
button.
button.
6. Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the
and then press the
button.
7. Select Fax to, and then press the
or
button to select the start time,
button.
Faxing
232
AL-MX200 Series
8. Select Keypad, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
9. Enter the number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
You can also use speed or group dial numbers.
See Also:
“Automatic Dialing” on page 242
10. Press the
(Start) button.
When the Delayed Start mode is activated, the printer scans and stores all the documents in its
memory and sends them at the specified time. The data in the memory is cleared upon completion
of the fax transmission.
Sending a Fax Using the Driver (Direct Fax)
®
®
You can send a fax directly from the computer running a Microsoft Windows operating system or
Mac OS X by using the driver.
®
Note:
❏ Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
❏ The cover page is not printed for direct fax job even if Fax Cover Page is enabled on the operator
panel.
Sending a Fax from Windows
Note:
❏ The following procedure uses Windows 7 WordPad as an example. The names of the windows and
the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the OS and
application you are using.
❏ The fax driver is installed along with the printer driver.
1. Open the file you want to send by fax.
2. Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select your fax driver.
Faxing
233
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Click Preferences.
4. Specify the fax settings. For more information, click Help of the driver.
Note:
The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
5. Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
6. Click Print.
Faxing
234
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The Set/Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears.
7. Specify the recipient in one of the following ways:
❏ Enter a name and phone number directly.
❏ Select a recipient from the Phone Book (PC Fax Address Book) saved on your computer or
Address Book (Device Address Book).
❏ Select a recipient from a database other than the Phone Book (PC Fax Address Book) or
Address Book (Device Address Book).
For details on how to specify the recipient, click Help to see the Help of the fax driver.
Note:
When the Fax service is locked with a password, enter the password in the Password box under
Authorization.
8. Click Start Sending.
Sending a Fax from Mac OS X
Note:
❏ The following procedure uses Mac OS X 10.6 TextEdit as an example. The names of the windows and
the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the OS and
application you are using.
Faxing
235
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ The fax driver is installed along with the printer driver.
1. Open the file you want to send by fax.
2. Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select your fax driver.
3. Specify the fax settings.
Note:
The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
4. Click Print.
Faxing
236
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The Set/Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears.
5. Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
❏ Specify a recipient directly.
a Enter a name and phone number directly.
b Click Add.
OR
❏ Select a recipient from the Address Book saved on your computer.
a Click Look Up Address Book.
The Refer To Address Book dialog box appears.
b Select a recipient and then click Add.
c Click OK.
Note:
When the Fax service is locked with a password, enter the password in the Password box under
Authorization.
Faxing
237
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Click Start Sending.
Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
There are five receiving modes: FAX Mode, TEL Mode, TEL/FAX Mode, Ans/FAX Mode, and DRPD
Mode.
Note:
❏ To use TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode, connect an external telephone or answering machine to
the phone connector ( ) on the rear of your printer.
❏ When the memory is full, you cannot receive a fax. Delete any documents you no longer need from
the memory.
See Also:
❏ “Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode” on page 239
❏ “Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode” on page 239
❏ “Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode” on page 239
❏ “Using an Answering Machine” on page 255
❏ “Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode” on page 240
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) are the same
whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized,
A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper.
See Also:
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏ “Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
❏ “Setting Paper Sizes and Types” on page 138
Faxing
238
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode
Your printer is preset to enter the FAX Mode by default.
When the printer receives an incoming fax transmission, it automatically enter the FAX Mode after a
predefined period of time and receives the fax.
To change the interval at which the printer enter the FAX Mode after receiving an incoming fax, see
“Auto Answer Fax” on page 283.
Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode
To receive a fax manually, pick up the handset of the external telephone, and then press the
(Fax)
(Start) button and select Manual Receive.
button. The fax menu opens. Then press the
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to standby mode when it is finished with the fax
reception.
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode
To use TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode, you must connect an external telephone to the phone
connector ( ) on the rear of your printer.
If the printer receives an incoming fax while in the TEL/FAX Mode, the external telephone rings for
the period of time specified for Auto Ans. TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically receives a
fax.
If a caller leaves a message while the printer is in the Ans/FAX Mode, the answering machine stores the
message as it would normally. If the printer hears a fax tone on the line, on the other hand, it
automatically starts receiving the fax.
Note:
If you have set a value for Auto Answer Fax and your answering machine is turned off or no answering
machine is connected, the printer will automatically enters the FAX Mode after a predefined period of
time.
See Also:
“Using an Answering Machine” on page 255
Faxing
239
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone
This feature works best for using an external telephone connected to the phone connector ( ) on the
rear of your printer. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to by pressing the two-digit
remote receive codes on the external telephone without having to go to the printer.
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press the two-digit keys on the
external telephone or the (Fax) button to enter the fax menu. OffHook appears. Then press the
(Start) button and select Manual Receive.
If you still hear the fax tone from the remote fax machine, try pressing the two-digit remote receive
code once again.
The Remote Receive option is disabled by default. You can change the two-digit remote receive code to
whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see “Remote Rcv Tone” on page 286.
Note:
Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode
The Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) is a service provided by some telephone companies.
This service assigns multiple telephone numbers to a single telephone line and distinguishes each line
with a distinctive ring pattern of long and short sounds. If this service is available from your telephone
company, subscribe the service and ask the telephone company which one of the available seven
DRPD patterns on your printer you can use for the service.
See Also:
“DRPD Pattern” on page 287
To receive faxes in the DRPD Mode, you need to place the printer in the DRPD Mode and select a
DRPD pattern. For details on placing the computer in the DRPD Mode, see “Ans Select” on page 282.
To set up DRPD, you will need another telephone line at your location or have someone dial your fax
number from outside.
To select a DRPD pattern:
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
Faxing
240
AL-MX200 Series
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
button.
4. Select DRPD Pattern, and then press the
button.
5. Select an appropriate DRPD pattern, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
6. Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or
printing. When the printer receives a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner,
it stores incoming faxes in the memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or replace the
toner cartridge, the printer automatically prints the faxes.
Polling Receive
You can poll and receive faxes from a remote fax machine anytime.
1. Press the
(Fax) button.
2. Select Polling Receive, and then press the
3. Select On, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine, and then press the
button.
Note:
For details on how to enter the fax number of the remote fax machine, see “Sending a Fax from
Memory” on page 229.
5. Press the
(Start) button.
Faxing
241
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in fax speed dial locations (01– 99).
When a delayed fax job or a redial job for a speed dial number exists, you cannot change the speed dial
number using the operator panel or EpsonNet Config.
Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing Using the Operator Panel
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Phone Book, and then press the
button.
4. Select Speed Dial, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired speed dial number between 01 and 99, and then press the
6. Select Name, and then press the
button.
button.
7. Enter the name using the numeric keypad, and then press the
8. Select Phone Number, and then press the
button.
button.
9. Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
To insert a pause between numbers, press the Redial/Pause button and confirm that “-” appears
on the LCD panel.
10. Select Apply Settings, and then press the
11. Select Yes, and then press the
button.
button.
12. Repeat steps 5 to 11 as needed to add speed dial numbers.
13. To quit adding speed dial numbers, keep pressing the
shows Select Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel
Faxing
242
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing Using a Computer
You can also create a personal address with EpsonNet Config or Address Book Editor for speed
dialing.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Using EpsonNet Config
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
Note:
For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see “Verifying the IP Settings” on
page 47.
3. Click the Address Book tab.
If a user name and password entry is prompted, enter the correct user name and password.
Note:
The default User ID and password are both blank (NULL).
Faxing
243
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Under Fax / E-mail, click Personal Address.
5. Select any unused number and click Add.
The Add Personal Address page appears.
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1
Name
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Address Book.
2
Phone Number
Enter the recipient’s phone number.
3
E-mail Address
Enter the recipient’s E-mail address.
Note:
The first eight entries in the Address Book correspond to the one-touch buttons on the operator
panel.
Faxing
244
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Click Apply to create the new address.
Using the Address Book Editor
1. Windows:
Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Address Book Editor.
Mac OS X:
From the Applications folder, select EPSON— your printer — Address Book Editor-Btype.
Note:
❏ The window to select a device appears when multiple fax drivers are installed on your computer.
In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Device Name. For Mac OS X,
double-click the desired printer in Select Device.
❏ The Enter Password window appears when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and click OK.
2. Click OK on the “Retrieval Successful” message window.
3. Right-click the Fax/E-Mail icon, and then select New — New Entry.
Faxing
245
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The Personal Address dialog box appears.
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1
Name
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Address Book.
2
Phone Number
Enter the recipient’s phone number.
3
E-mail Address
Enter the recipient’s E-mail address.
Note:
❏ If you want to change the automatically assigned address ID, select the Specify an Address
Number check box, and then enter a value from 1 to 99 for ID (Speed Dial Number).
❏ The first eight entries in the Address Book correspond to the one-touch buttons on the operator
panel.
4. Click OK.
5. On the File menu, select Save All.
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dialing
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 225
Faxing
246
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass” on page 226
2. Press the
(Fax) button and do either of the following:
❏ Select Fax to, and then press the
button.
button. Select Speed Dial, and then press the
❏ Press the Speed Dial button.
3. Enter a speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad.
The corresponding entry's name briefly appears on the LCD panel.
4. Press the
button.
5. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs.
See Also:
❏ “Resolution” on page 227
❏ “Lighten/Darken” on page 228
6. Press the
(Start) button to scan and store the document in the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page. If you
have more pages to send, select Yes, replace the page with a new one and select Continue, repeat
the actions for the remaining pages, and press the
button. Otherwise, select No and press the
button.
The printer dials the fax number stored as the speed dial number and send the fax when the remote
fax machine answers.
Note:
Using an asterisk (*) in the digit of the speed dial number, you can send a document to multiple locations.
For example, if you enter 0*, you can send a document to the destinations registered to the speed dial
numbers 01 through 09.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can group the fax numbers for
these destinations together to create a group dialing number. This enables you to send a fax to multiple
destinations by specifying a single group dialing number. You can create up to six group dial numbers.
Faxing
247
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
You cannot include a group dial number within another group dial number.
Creating Group Dial Numbers Using the Operator Panel
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Phone Book, and then press the
button.
4. Select Group Dial, and then press the
button.
5. Select a group dial number between 01 and 06, and then press the
6. Select Name, and then press the
button.
button.
7. Enter your desired name, and then press the
8. Select Speed Dial No, and then press the
button.
button.
9. Select speed dial numbers to include in the group dial number, and then press the
10. Select Apply Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
11. Select Yes when Are You Sure? is displayed, and then press the
button.
12. To create more group dial numbers, repeat steps 5 to 11.
13. To quit creating group dial numbers, keep pressing the
shows Select Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel
Editing Group Dial Numbers Using the Operator Panel
You can add/delete a speed dial number(s) to/from a group dial number.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
Faxing
248
AL-MX200 Series
3. Select Phone Book, and then press the
button.
4. Select Group Dial, and then press the
button.
5. Select the group dial number that you want to edit, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
6. To change the group dial name:
a Select Name, and then press the
button.
b Enter a new name, and then press the
button.
c Select Apply Settings, and then press the
button.
d Select Yes when Are You Sure? is displayed, and then press the
button.
7. To change the speed dial number:
a Select Speed Dial No, and then press the
button.
b Select or deselect a desired speed dial number(s), and then press the
c Select Apply Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
d Select Yes when Are You Sure? is displayed, and then press the
button.
Note:
Deselecting all speed dial numbers in the group dial number does not delete the group dial number
itself. To delete the group dial number, press the C (Clear) button step b above and proceed to step
d.
8. If you want to edit another group dial number, repeat steps 5 to 8.
9. To quit editing group dial numbers, keep pressing the
shows Select Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel
Creating and Editing a Fax Group Using a Computer
You can also create and edit a fax group with EpsonNet Config or Address Book Editor.
Faxing
249
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
Using EpsonNet Config
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
Note:
For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see “Verifying the IP Settings” on
page 47.
3. Click the Address Book tab.
If a user name and password entry is prompted, enter the correct user name and password.
Note:
The default User ID and password are both blank (NULL).
4. Under Fax / E-mail, click Fax Group.
Faxing
250
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. Select any unused number and click Add.
The Add Fax Group page appears.
6. Enter a group name in the Group Name box, and then click Apply.
7. Click Back to return to the previous screen, and then select the group name you just created.
The Edit Fax Group page appears.
8. Select a phone number you want to add in the fax group, and then click Apply.
Using the Address Book Editor
1. Windows:
Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Address Book Editor.
Mac OS X:
From the Applications folder, select EPSON— your printer — Address Book Editor-Btype.
Note:
❏ The window to select a device appears when multiple fax drivers are installed on your computer.
In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Device Name. For Mac OS X,
double-click the desired printer in Select Device.
Faxing
251
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ The Enter Password window appears when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and click OK.
2. Click OK on the “Retrieval Successful” message window.
3. Right-click the Fax/E-Mail icon, and then select New — New Fax Group.
The Group Dial dialog box appears.
4. Enter the name that you want it to appear in the Address Book in the Group Name box.
5. Click the Add or Delete button.
6. Select group members from List of Selectable Members.
7. Click Add, and then click OK.
8. Click OK again to create the group.
9. (Windows only)
Confirm the group memberes, and then click OK.
10. On the File menu, select Save All.
Note:
To edit the existed fax group, click the Fax/E-Mail icon and double-click the fax group you want to
edit, and then repeat steps 5 to 10.
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dial numbers for broadcasting or delayed transmissions.
Faxing
252
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
See Also:
“Sending a Delayed Fax” on page 232
1. Load a document(s) face up on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) with the top edge going in
first; or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover.
See Also:
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 225
❏ “Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass” on page 226
2. Press the
(Fax) button.
3. Select Fax to, and then press the
button.
4. Select Group Dial, and then press the
button.
5. Press the or button to enter a group dial number between 01 and 06, and then press the
button to make or clear the selection.
The corresponding entry's name briefly appears on the LCD panel.
6. Press the
button.
7. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs.
See Also:
❏ “Resolution” on page 227
❏ “Lighten/Darken” on page 228
8. Press the
(Start) button to scan and store the document in the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page. If you
have more pages to send, select Yes, replace the page with a new one and select Continue, repeat
the actions for the remaining pages, and press the
button. Otherwise, select No and press the
button.
The printer dials the fax number stored as the speed dial number and send the fax when the remote
fax machine answers.
Faxing
253
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Printing the Address Book List
You can review your automatic dial entries by printing the Address Book List.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Report / List, and then press the
button.
3. Select Address Book, and then press the
button.
A list of your speed and group dial entries is printed.
Other Ways to Fax
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from unauthorized access. Use the secure receiving
mode to prohibit printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended. In the secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes will be stored in the memory. You can then turn off the mode to
print all the stored faxes.
Note:
Before operation, ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
To turn on the secure receiving mode:
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Enter the password specified for Panel Lock, and then press the
button.
Note:
The factory-default panel password is 0000.
4. Select Secure Settings, and then press the
5. Select Secure Receive, and then press the
button.
button.
6. Select Secure Receive Set, and then press the
button.
Faxing
254
AL-MX200 Series
7. Select Enable, and then press the
8. Press the
User’s Guide
button.
(Back) button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function.
While in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores received faxes in the memory and displays
Secure Receive in the Job Status screen to indicate it has faxes stored in the memory.
Note:
If you change the panel password while Secure Receive Set is set to Enable, perform steps 1
through 5 above, select Change Password, and then press the
button. Enter a new password,
and then press the
button.
To print stored faxes:
1. Press the Job Status button.
2. Select Secure Receive, and then press the
3. Enter the password, and then press the
button.
button.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn off the secure receiving mode:
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “To turn on the secure receiving mode:” to access the Secure
Receive Set menu.
2. Select Disable, and then press the
3. Press the
button.
(Back) button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function.
Using an Answering Machine
Faxing
255
AL-MX200 Series
1
To the wall jack
2
Printer
3
Line
4
Telephone Answering Device
5
Phone
User’s Guide
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the rear of your printer as shown
above.
❏ Place your printer in the Ans/FAX Mode and specify for Auto Ans. Ans/FAX a period of time
before the TAD responds.
❏ When the TAD picks up an incoming call, the printer monitors and takes the line if it hears a fax
tone and then starts receiving the fax.
❏ When the TAD is turned off, the printer automatically enters the FAX Mode after a predefined
period of time.
Using a Computer Modem
1
To the internet
2
Computer
3
Printer
4
Line
5
Telephone Answering Device
6
Phone
Faxing
256
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or dial-up internet connection, connect the
computer modem directly to the rear of your printer with the TAD as shown above.
❏ Place your printer in the Ans/FAX Mode and specify for Auto Ans. Ans/FAX a period of time
before the TAD responds.
❏ Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
❏ Do not use the computer modem while your printer is sending or receiving a fax.
❏ Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the
computer modem.
Setting Sounds
Speaker Volume
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
button.
4. Select Line Monitor, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired volume, and then press the
button.
6. Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Ringer Volume
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Select Ring Tone Volume, and then press the
button.
Faxing
257
AL-MX200 Series
5. Select the desired volume, and then press the
User’s Guide
button.
6. Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Specifying the Fax Settings
Customizing Fax Options
Your printer is provided with a variety of options that you can use to configure the fax feature. For
details on the available menu items, see “Available Fax Options” on page 258.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad.
6. Press the
button to save the selection.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 as needed to change the setting.
8. To quit changing settings, keep pressing the
Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel shows Select
Available Fax Options
You can use the following options for configuring the fax feature of your printer:
Faxing
258
AL-MX200 Series
Option
Ans Select
User’s Guide
Description
TEL Mode
The printer does not automatically receive faxes. To receive an
incoming fax, you need to pick up the handset of the connected
external telephone and press the 2-digit remote receive code.
FAX Mode
This option is selected by default and the printer automatically
receives faxes.
TEL/FAX Mode
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
rings for the period of time specified for Auto Ans. TEL/FAX, and
then the printer automatically receives the fax. If an incoming call is not
a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the
call is a telephone call.
Ans/FAX Mode
The printer shares the telephone line with an answering machine and
monitors the line for a fax tone. It will pick up an incoming call if it hears
a fax tone. This option is not available in regions where a serial phone
system is employed.
DRPD Mode
To use this option, you need to subscribe the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) service from your telephone company that assigns
multiple telephone numbers to a single telephone line and
distinguishes each line with a distinctive ring pattern. Once this service
is activated, then you can configure your printer to monitor the line for
the distinctive ring pattern.
Auto Answer Fax
Specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the
FAX Mode upon reception of an incoming call.
Auto Ans. TEL/FAX
Specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the
FAX Mode when the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Ans. Ans/FAX
Specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the
FAX Mode when the answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor
Select a volume level of the sound that the printer emits from the
internal speaker while establishing a connection for fax transmission.
Ring Tone Volume
Select a volume level of the ring tone that the printer emits from the
internal speaker to indicate an incoming telephone call while in the
TEL/FAX Mode.
Line Type
Select the line type.
Dialing Type
Select the dialing type.
Note:
DP (10pps) is not displayed when South Africa is set for Region.
Interval Timer
Specify an interval between transmission attempts.
Faxing
259
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Option
Description
Number of Redial
Specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination
fax number is busy. If you specify 0, the printer will not redial.
Redial Delay
Specify an interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Filter
Select whether to reject faxes from the numbers that are not included
in the Phone Book.
Remote Receive
Select whether to use this option. With this option enabled, you can
pick up the handset and enter the remote receive code to receive a
fax.
Remote Rcv Tone
Specify the remote receive code in two digits for the Remote Receive
option.
Send Header
Select whether to print the sender information on the header of faxes.
Company Name
Enter a sender name of up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Your Fax Number
Enter the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of
faxes.
Fax Cover Page
Select whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Note:
The cover page is not printed for direct fax job even if Fax Cover Page
is enabled on the operator panel.
DRPD Pattern
Select a ring pattern for the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
service.
2-Sided Print
Select whether to print on either side of the paper.
Forward Settings
Select how you want to forward received faxes.
Fax Fwd Number
Enter the forwarding fax number when you have selected Forward
and Print for Forward Settings.
Fax Fwd E-Mail
Enter the forwarding e-mail address when you have selected E-Mail
and Print for Forward Settings.
Prefix Dial
Select whether to insert a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num
Enter a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before
any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private
Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size
Select whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of
the page.
Faxing
260
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Option
Description
ECM
Select whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote fax
machines must also support the ECM.
Extel Hook Thresh
Select an external telephone hook detection threshold for the
condition in which a telephone line is not being used.
Modem Speed
Select a fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error
occurs.
Fax Activity
Select whether to automatically print the Fax Activity Report after
every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit
Select whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast
Select whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Region
Select the region where the printer is used.
Prefix Dial
The prefix dial number is required in an environment where out-going fax calls go through a PBX
machine.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
4. Select Line Type, and then press the
5. Select PBX, and then press the
6. Press the
button.
button.
(Back) button to return to the previous menu.
7. Select Prefix Dial, and then press the
8. Select On, and then press the
9. Press the
button.
button.
button.
(Back) button to return to the previous menu.
10. Select Prefix Dial Num, and then press the
button.
Faxing
261
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
11. Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number using 0–9, *, and #.
12. Confirm the prefix dial number on the LCD panel is correct, and then press the
button.
13. Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Changing the Default Fax Settings
You can customize the default fax settings using the menu items that you use most frequently.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Defaults Settings, and then press the
3. Select Fax Defaults, and then press the
button.
button.
4. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
5. Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, as needed.
7. To quit changing the default settings, keep pressing the
shows Select Function.
(Back) button until the LCD panel
Printing a Report
The following reports may be useful when using the fax function:
❏ Address Book List
This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer as Address Book
information.
❏ Fax Activity Report
This report shows information about the recent 50 faxes you received or sent.
❏ Protocol Monitor
Faxing
262
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
This report shows a detailed list of monitored protocols.
❏ Monitor Report
This report shows the details of a fax job. This is printed when the fax was successfully sent.
❏ Transmission Report
This report shows the details of a fax job. This is printed when the fax transmission failed.
❏ Broadcast Report
This report shows all the destinations of a broadcast fax and the transmission result for each
destination.
Note:
The reports and lists are all printed in English.
To print a report or list:
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Report / List, and then press the
button.
3. Select a report or list you want to print, and then press the
button.
The selected report or list is printed.
Note:
You cannot manually print the Monitor Report, Transmission Report, and Broadcast Report with the
above procedure. They will be printed as specified upon completion of a fax job. For details on setting
when to print them, see “Fax Transmit” on page 291 or “Fax Broadcast” on page 292.
Faxing
263
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 9
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
Understanding the Operator Panel Menus
When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users, access to the Admin
Menu may be restricted. This prevents unauthorized users from using the operator panel to
inadvertently change the default menu settings that have been set by the administrator. However, you
can change settings for individual print jobs using the print driver. Print settings selected on the print
driver have precedence over the default menu settings on the operator panel.
Report / List
Use Report / List to print various types of reports and lists.
Note:
❏ A password is required to use the Report / List menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
In this case, enter the password you specified, and press the
button.
❏ The reports and lists are all printed in English.
System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of information such as the printer name, the serial number, print volume, and network
settings.
Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.
Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 50 jobs.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
264
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
PCL Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of available PCL fonts.
®
PS Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of available PostScript Level3 Compatible and PDF fonts.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.
Address Book
Purpose:
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.
Meter Readings
Use Meter Readings to check the total number of printed pages.
Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu to configure a variety of printer features.
Note:
A password is required to use the Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the
button.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
265
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
Note:
The first eight entries are assigned to the one-touch buttons on the operator panel.
See Also:
“Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing Using the Operator Panel” on page 242
Group Dial
Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a 2-digit dial code. Up to six group dial codes
can be registered.
See Also:
“Creating Group Dial Numbers Using the Operator Panel” on page 248
PCL Settings
Use the PCL Settings menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation
printer language.
Paper Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
A4 - 210x297mm*
A5 - 148x210mm
B5 - 182x257mm
Letter - 8.5x11"
Folio - 8.5x13"
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
266
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Legal - 8.5x14"
Executive
Statement
#10 Env. - 4.125x9.5"
Monarch Env.
Monarch Env. L
DL Env. - 110x220mm
DL Env. L
C5 Env. - 162x229mm
Postcard JPN - 148x100mm
W-Postcard JPN - 148x200mm
Env Yougata 2
Env Yougata 2L
Env Yougata 3
Env Yougata 3L
Env Yougata 4
Env Yougata 6
Env Younaga 3
Env Nagagata 3
Env Nagagata 4
Env Kakugata 3
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
267
AL-MX200 Series
New
Custom
Size
Portrait(Y)
297mm*/11.7inch*
127mm - 355mm/
5.0inch - 14.0inch
Landscape(X)
210mm*/8.3inch*
77mm - 215mm/
3.0inch - 8.5inch
*
User’s Guide
Specifies the length of the custom size paper. Which
factory default menu setting displays depends on the
value selected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for
more information.
Specifies the width of the custom size paper. Which
factory default menu setting displays depends on the
value selected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for
more information.
Factory default menu setting
Orientation
Purpose:
To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Values:
*
Portrait*
Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Landscape
Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.
Factory default menu setting
2-Sided
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on either side of paper.
Values:
2-Sided Print
Binding Edge
*
Off
Does not print on either side of paper.
On*
Prints on either side of paper.
Flip Long Edge*
Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the long edge.
Flip Short Edge
Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the short edge.
Factory default menu setting
Font
Purpose:
To select the default font from the fonts installed on the printer.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
268
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Values:
Courier*
AlbertusMd
ITCBookmanDb
CGTimes
AlbertusXb
ITCBookmanLtIt
CGTimesBd
Arial
ITCBookmanDbIt
CGTimesIt
ArialBd
NwCentSchlbkRmn
CGTimesBdIt
ArialIt
NwCentSchlbkBd
CGOmega
ArialBdIt
NwCentSchlbkIt
CGOmegaBd
TimesNew
NwCentSchlbkBdIt
CGOmegaIt
TimesNewBd
Times
CGOmegaBdIt
TimesNewIt
TimesBd
Coronet
TimesNewBdIt
TimesIt
ClarendonCd
Helvetica
TimesBdIt
UniversMd
HelveticaBd
ZapfChanceryMdIt
UniversBd
HelveticaOb
Symbol
UniversMdIt
HelveticaBdOb
SymbolPS
UniversBdIt
HelveticaNr
Wingdings
UniversMdCd
HelveticaNrBd
ZapfDingbats
UniversBdCd
HelveticaNrOb
CourierBd
UniversMdCdIt
HelveticaNrBdOb
CourierIt
UniversBdCdIt
PalatinoRmn
CourierBdIt
AntiqueOlv
PalatinoBd
LetterGothic
AntiqueOlvBd
PalatinoIt
LetterGothicBd
AntiqueOlvIt
PalatinoBdIt
LetterGothicIt
GarmondAntiqua
ITCAvantGardBk
CourierPS
GarmondHlb
ITCAvantGardDb
CourierPSBd
GarmondKrsv
ITCAvantGardBkOb
CourierPSOb
GarmondKrsvHlb
ITCAvantGardDbOb
CourierPSBdOb
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
269
AL-MX200 Series
Marigold
*
ITCBookmanLt
User’s Guide
Line Printer
Factory default menu setting
Symbol Set
Purpose:
To specify a symbol set for the specified font.
Values:
*
PC-8*
PS MATH
WINGDINGS
PC-8 DN
PI FONT
DNGBTSMS
PC-850
LEGAL
ISO-L6
PC-852
ISO-4
PC-1004
PC-8 TK
ISO-6
PC-775
WIN L1
ISO-11
WINBALT
WIN L2
ISO-15
UCS-2
WIN L5
ISO-17
ROMAN-8
DESKTOP
ISO-21
ROMANEXT
MC TEXT
ISO-60
ISO-L1
PS TEXT
ISO-69
ISO-L2
MS PUB
WIN 3.0
ISO-L5
MATH-8
SYMBOL
Factory default menu setting
Font Size
Purpose:
To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts, within a range from 4.00 to 50.00. The default
is 12.00.
Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an
inch.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
270
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
The Font Size menu item only appears for typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Purpose:
To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts, within a range from 6.00 to 24.00. The
default is 10.00.
Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For
nonscheduled mono spaced fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
Note:
The Font Pitch menu item only appears for fixed or mono spaced font.
Form Line
Purpose:
To set the number of lines in a page.
Values:
72*
Select the value in increments of 1.
5-128
*
Factory default menu setting
Note:
The printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Line
and Orientation settings. Make sure that the Form Line and Orientation settings are correct
before changing the Form Line setting.
Quantity
Purpose:
To set the default print quantity, within a range from 1 to 999. The default is 1. (Set the number of
copies required for a specific job on the print driver. Values selected on the print driver always
override values selected on the operator panel.)
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
271
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Image Enhance
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature which makes the boundary line between black
and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.
Values:
*
Off*
Disables the Image Enhance feature.
On
Enables the Image Enhance feature.
Factory default menu setting
Draft Mode
Purpose:
To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when you print in the draft
mode.
Values:
*
Disable*
Does not print in the draft mode.
Enable
Prints in the draft mode.
Factory default menu setting
Line Termination
Purpose:
To add the line termination commands.
Values:
Off*
The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-CR
The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
Add-LF
The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
272
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The CR and LF commands are added.
CR-XX
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
*
Factory default menu setting
PS Settings
Use the PS Settings menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript Level3
Compatible printer language.
PS Error Report
Purpose:
To specify whether to print the description of errors concerning the PostScript Level3 Compatible
printer language.
Values:
*
Off
Dose not print the PS error report.
On*
Prints the PS error report.
Factory default menu setting
PS Job Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify the runtime of a single job using the PostScript Level3 Compatible printer language.
Values:
Off*
On
Does not set the runtime of a PS job.
1min
Sets the runtime of a PS job.
1min - 900min
*
Factory default menu setting
PDF Settings
Use the PDF Settings menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
273
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Quantity
Purpose:
To specify the number of copies to print.
Values:
1*
Select a value in increments of 1.
1 - 999
*
Factory default menu setting
2-Sided
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on either side of paper.
Values:
2-Sided Print
Binding Edge
*
Off
Does not print on either side of paper.
On*
Prints on either side of paper.
Flip Long Edge*
Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the long edge.
Flip Short Edge
Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the short edge.
Factory default menu setting
Print Mode
Purpose:
To specify the print mode.
Values:
*
Normal*
For documents with normal sized characters.
High Quality
For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using
a dot-matrix printer.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
274
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
PDF Password
Purpose:
To specify a password for printing secure PDF files.
Values:
********************************
Enter a password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters for printing secure PDF
files.
Paper Size
Purpose:
To specify the output paper size for PDF files.
Values:
A4 - 210x297mm*
Letter - 8.5x11"
Auto
*
Factory default menu setting
Layout
Purpose:
To specify the output layout.
Values:
Auto %*
100% (No Zoom)
2 Pages Up
4 Pages Up
*
Factory default menu setting
Network
Use the Network option to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the
network.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
275
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Ethernet
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. To make any changes
effective, turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
Values:
*
Auto*
Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.
10BASE-T Half
Uses 10base-T half-duplex.
10BASE-T Full
Uses 10base-T full-duplex.
100BASE-TX Half
Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.
100BASE-TX Full
Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wired network.
Wireless Status (AL-MX200DWF only)
Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. No changes can be made on the operator
panel to improve the status of the wireless connection.
Values:
Connection
SSID
Good
Indicates good signal strength.
Acceptable
Indicates marginal signal strength.
Low
Indicates insufficient signal strength.
No Reception
Indicates that no signal is received.
XXXXX
As the factory default menu setting, “wireless_device”
is specified in advance.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
276
AL-MX200 Series
Encryption Type
User’s Guide
No Security
A wireless network is configured with no security.
WEP
A wireless network is configured with the WEP
encryption.
WPA-PSK-TKIP
A wireless network is configured with the
WPA-PSK-TKIP encryption.
WPA2-PSK-AES
A wireless network is configured with the
WPA2-PSK-AES encryption.
Mixed Mode PSK
A wireless network is configured with the Mixed Mode
PSK encryption.
Note:
This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Wireless Setup (AL-MX200DWF only)
Purpose:
To configure wireless network settings.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
277
AL-MX200 Series
Manual
Setup
Enter Network
(SSID)
Enter a name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify the wireless
network. As the factory default menu setting, “wireless_device” is specified in
advance.
Infrastructure
Configures a wireless network with access points.
No Security*
Configures a wireless network without security encryp‐
tion.
Mixed Mode
PSK
Configures a wireless network with the WPA-PSK-TKIP,
WPA-PSK-AES and the WPA2-PSK-AES encryption.
PassPhrase
Entry
WPA-PSK-TKIP
WPA2-PSK-AES
Enter a passphrase of 8 to 63
alphanumeric characters.
Configures a wireless network with the WEP encryption
and specify a WEP key of 5 or 13 ASCII characters; or 10 or
26 hexadecimal characters.
Transmit Key
Ad-hoc
Enter a passphrase of 8 to 63
alphanumeric characters.
Configures a wireless network with the WPA2-PSK-AES
encryption.
PassPhrase
Entry
WEP
Enter a passphrase of 8 to 63
alphanumeric characters.
Configures a wireless network with the WPA-PSK-TKIP en‐
cryption.
PassPhrase
Entry
Select the transmit key from Auto,
WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3,
and WEP Key 4.
Configures a wireless network without access points.
No Security*
Configures a wireless network without security encryp‐
tion.
WEP
Configures a wireless network with the WEP encryption
and specify a WEP key of 5 or 13 ASCII characters; or 10 or
26 hexadecimal characters.
Transmit Key
*
User’s Guide
Select the transmit key from WEP Key
1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP
Key 4.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
278
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
WPS Setup (AL-MX200DWF only)
No*
Disables the PBC method for the WPS encryption.
Yes
Enables the PBC method for the WPS encryption.
Push
Button
Control
PBC Start
PIN Code
Start
Configuration
Starts configuring wireless network settings using the PIN code assigned au‐
tomatically by the printer.
Print PIN Code
Prints the PIN code to be entered on the computer for the WPS encryption
setup.
*
Factory default menu setting
Note:
This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Reset Wireless (AL-MX200DWF only)
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. Enabling this feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the
wireless settings to their factory default settings.
Values:
No*
Does not reset the wireless setting.
Yes
Resets the wireless setting.
*
Factory default menu setting
Note:
This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings. To make any changes effective, turn off the printer and then turn it back
on.
Values:
IP Mode
Dual Stack*
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
279
AL-MX200 Series
IPv4
*
Get IP Address
DHCP/AutoIP*
Automatically sets the IP address.
BOOTP
Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
RARP
Uses RARP to set the IP address.
DHCP
Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Panel
Enter the IP address on the operator panel.
IP Address
Enter the IP address allocated to the printer.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Address
Enter the gateway address.
User’s Guide
Factory default menu setting
Note:
To configure the IPv6 settings, use EpsonNet Config.
Protocol
Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. To make any changes effective, turn off the printer and then turn it
back on.
Values:
LPD
Port 9100
WSD*2
SNMP
StatusMessenger
Disable
Disables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.
Enable*1
Enables the LPD port.
Disable
Disables the Port 9100 port.
Enable*1
Enables the Port 9100 port.
Disable
Disables the Web Services on Devices port.
Enable*1
Enables the Web Services on Devices port.
Disable
Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.
Enable*1
Enables the SNMP UDP port.
Disable
Disables the StatusMessenger feature.
Enable*1
Enables the StatusMessenger feature.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
280
AL-MX200 Series
InternetServices
Bonjour(mDNS)
User’s Guide
Disable
Disables an access to EpsonNet Config embedded in the printer.
Enable*1
Enables an access to EpsonNet Config embedded in the printer.
Disable
Disables the Bonjour
Enable*1
Enables the Bonjour (mDNS).
® (mDNS).
*1 Factory default menu setting
*2 WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
IP Filter
Note:
The IP Filter feature is supported for IPv4 addresses and available only when Protocol is set to LPD or
Port 9100.
Purpose:
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the network. You can set up to five IP
addresses. To make any changes effective, turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
Values:
No.n/Address (n is 1 - 5.)
Sets the IP address for Filter n.
No.n/Mask (n is 1 - 5.)
Sets the address mask for Filter n.
No.n/Mode
(n is 1 - 5.)
*
Off*
Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n.
Accept
Accepts an access from the specified IP address.
Reject
Rejects an access from the specified IP address.
Factory default menu setting
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in Non-Volatile Memory (NVM). Enabling this feature and
rebooting the printer will reset all the wired network settings to their factory default values.
Values:
Yes
Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
281
AL-MX200 Series
No*
*
User’s Guide
Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM.
Factory default menu setting
PS Data Format
Purpose:
To set the PS data communications protocol. To make any changes effective, turn off the printer and
then turn it back on.
Values:
*
Auto*
Sets the PS data communications protocol automatically.
Standard
Sets the PS data communications protocol to Standard.
BCP
Sets the PS data communications protocol to BCP.
TBCP
Sets the PS data communications protocol to TBCP.
Factory default menu setting
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
Ans Select
Purpose:
To specify the default fax receiving mode.
Values:
TEL Mode
The printer does not automatically receive faxes. To receive an incoming fax,
you need to pick up the handset of the connected external telephone and press
the 2-digit code.
FAX Mode*
The printer automatically receives faxes.
TEL/FAX Mode
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the
period of time specified for Auto Ans. TEL/FAX, and then the printer
automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps
from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans/FAX Mode
The printer shares the telephone line with an answering machine and monitors
the line for a fax tone. It will pick up an incoming call if it hears a fax tone. This
option is not available in regions where a serial phone system is employed.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
282
AL-MX200 Series
DRPD Mode
*
User’s Guide
To use this option, you need to subscribe the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) service from your telephone company that assigns multiple telephone
numbers to a single telephone line and distinguishes each line with a
distinctive ring pattern. Once this service is activated, then you can configure
your printer to monitor the line for the distinctive ring pattern.
Factory default menu setting
Auto Answer Fax
Purpose:
To specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode upon reception
of an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0
second.
Auto Ans. TEL/FAX
Purpose:
To specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode when the
external telephone receives an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255
seconds. The default is 6 seconds.
Auto Ans. Ans/FAX
Purpose:
To specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode when the
answering machine receives an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255
seconds. The default is 21 seconds.
Line Monitor
Purpose:
To specify the volume of the sound that the printer emits from the internal speaker while establishing a
connection for fax transmission.
Values:
Off
Turns off the line monitor.
Min
Sets the volume of the line monitor.
Middle*
Max
*
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
283
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Ring Tone Volume
Purpose:
To specify the volume of the ring tone that the printer emits from the internal speaker to indicate an
incoming telephone call while in the TEL/FAX Mode.
Values:
Off
Turns off the ring tone.
Min
Sets the volume of the ring tone.
Middle
Max*
*
Factory default menu setting
Line Type
Purpose:
To specify the line type.
Values:
*
PSTN*
Sets the line type to PSTN.
PBX
Sets the line type to PBX.
Factory default menu setting
Dialing Type
Purpose:
To specify the dialing type.
Values:
*
Tone*
Uses the touch-tone dialing system.
DP (10pps)
Uses the pulse dialing system (10 pulses per second).
Factory default menu setting
Note:
DP (10pps) is not displayed when South Africa is set for Region.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
284
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Interval Timer
Purpose:
To specify an interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default
is 8 seconds.
Number of Redial
Purpose:
To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy, within the
range of 0 to 9. If you specify 0, the printer will not redial. The default is 3.
Redial Delay
Purpose:
To specify an interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes. The default is 1
minute.
Junk Fax Filter
Purpose:
To reject faxes from the numbers that are not included in the Address Book.
Values:
*
Off*
Accepts all faxes.
On
Rejects faxes sent from the numbers that are not included in the Address Book.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
Ensure to register the fax numbers you want to accept faxes from in the Address Book before using Junk
Fax Filter.
Remote Receive
Purpose:
To receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the
handset of the telephone.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
285
AL-MX200 Series
*
User’s Guide
Off*
You cannot receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external
telephone.
On
You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external
telephone.
Factory default menu setting
Remote Rcv Tone
Purpose:
To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start the Remote Receive action. As the factory
default menu setting, 00 is specified in advance.
Send Header
Purpose:
To print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Values:
*
Off
Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
On*
Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Factory default menu setting
Company Name
Purpose:
To specify the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters
can be entered.
Your Fax Number
Purpose:
To specify the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page
Purpose:
To specify whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
286
AL-MX200 Series
*
Off*
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
On
Attaches a cover page to faxes.
User’s Guide
Factory default menu setting
Note:
The cover page is not printed for direct fax job even if Fax Cover Page is enabled on the operator
panel.
DRPD Pattern
Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
287
AL-MX200 Series
Pattern1-7
User’s Guide
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD patterns are
specified by your telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer
are shown below:
Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
Pattern4
Pattern5
Pattern6
Pattern7
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this
service. For example, Pattern7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ring
pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400
ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to
Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.
2-Sided Print
Purpose:
To specify whether to use the duplex printing for faxing.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
288
AL-MX200 Series
*
Off*
Disables the duplex printing.
On
Enables the duplex printing.
User’s Guide
Factory default menu setting
Forward Settings
Purpose:
To specify whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Values:
*
Off*
Incoming faxes will not be forwarded.
Forward and Print
Incoming faxes will be printed and forwarded to a specified destination.
E-Mail and Print
Incoming faxes will be printed and sent with an e-mail to a specified
destination.
Factory default menu setting
Fax Fwd Number
Purpose:
To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Fax Fwd E-Mail
Purpose:
To enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes will be sent with an e-mail.
Prefix Dial
Purpose:
To specify whether to insert a prefix dial number.
Values:
*
Off*
Does not insert a prefix dial number.
On
Inserts a prefix dial number.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
289
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Prefix Dial Num
Purpose:
To specify the prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number will be dialed before any automatic
dialing number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size
Purpose:
To specify whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not
fit onto the output paper.
Values:
*
Off
Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
On
Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.
Auto Reduction*
Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.
Factory default menu setting
ECM
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote fax
machines must also support the ECM.
Values:
*
Off
Disables the ECM.
On*
Enables the ECM.
Factory default menu setting
Extel Hook Thresh
Purpose:
To specify the external telephone hook detection threshold for the condition in which a telephone line
is not being used.
Values:
Lower
Sets the external telephone hook detection threshold to Lower.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
290
AL-MX200 Series
*
Normal*
Sets the external telephone hook detection threshold to Normal.
Higher
Sets the external telephone hook detection threshold to Higher.
User’s Guide
Factory default menu setting
Modem Speed
Purpose:
To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Values:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps*
*
Factory default menu setting
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically print the Fax Activity Report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.
Values:
*
Auto Print*
Automatically prints the Fax Activity Report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.
No Auto Print
Does not automatically print the Fax Activity Report.
Factory default menu setting
Fax Transmit
Purpose:
To specify whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
291
AL-MX200 Series
*
Print Always
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error*
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
User’s Guide
Factory default menu setting
Fax Broadcast
Purpose:
To specify whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations
or only when an error occurs.
Values:
*
Print Always*
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple
destinations.
Print On Error
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple
destinations.
Factory default menu setting
Region
Purpose:
To specify the region where the printer is used.
System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.
Power Saver Timer
Purpose:
To specify a time period before the printer enter each power saver mode.
Values:
Low Power
Timer
1min*
1min - 45min
By default, the printer enters Low Power mode in one
minute of inactivity after completion of the last job.
You can change the Low Power Timer setting within
a range from 1 to 45 minutes.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
292
AL-MX200 Series
Sleep Timer
6min*
6min - 11min
*
User’s Guide
By default, the printer enters Sleep mode in six
minutes of inactivity starting from the moment it
entered Low Power mode. You can change the Sleep
Timer setting within a range from 6 to 11 minutes.
Factory default menu setting
Select 1min (default) for Low Power Timer if your printer shares an electrical circuit with your room
lights and you notice them flickering. Otherwise, select a high value to keep your printer available for
frequent use with the minimum warm-up time.
The printer automatically exits a power saver mode when it receives a print job from a computer or fax
data through the telephone line. Alternatively, you can manually bring it back to the ready-to-print
state. Press any button on the operator panel in Low Power mode. In Sleep mode, press the (Energy
Saver) button. Whether the printer is in Low Power or Sleep mode, it will take about 25 seconds for
the printer to resume the ready-to-print state.
Auto Reset
Purpose:
To specify a time period before the printer restores the default setting for the current menu item and
resumes the ready-to-print state when an attempt to change the setting is left unfinished.
Values:
45sec*
1min
2min
3min
4min
*
Factory default menu setting
Fault Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify a time period before the printer cancels a job that has halted abnormally. Any job will be
cancelled when it times out.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
293
AL-MX200 Series
Disables the fault time-out feature.
Off
On
60sec*
3sec - 300sec
*
User’s Guide
By default, the printer cancels a job in 60 seconds after the job halts
abnormally. You can change the setting within a range from 3 to 300
seconds.
Factory default menu setting
Job Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify a time period that the printer waits to receive data from a computer. Any print job will be
cancelled when it times out.
Values:
Disables the job time-out feature.
Off
On
30sec*
5sec - 300sec
*
By default, the printer waits to receive data from a computer for 30
seconds. You can change the setting within a range from 5 to 300
seconds.
Factory default menu setting
Clock Settings
Purpose:
To specify the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:
Set Date
Sets the current date.
Set Time
Sets the current time.
Date Format
yy/mm/dd
Sets the date format.
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy*
Time Format
12H
Sets the time format.
24H*
Time Zone
*
Sets the time zone.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
294
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Alert Tone
Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message
appears.
Values:
Panel Select Tone
Off*
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
Min
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is
correct.
Middle
Max
Panel Alert Tone
Off*
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Min
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is
incorrect.
Middle
Max
Auto Clear Alert
Off*
Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.
Min
Emits a tone at the specified volume five seconds before the printer
performs auto clear.
Middle
Max
Job Tone
Off
Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.
Min
Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete.
Middle*
Max
Alert Tone
Off
Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
Min
Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs.
Middle*
Max
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
295
AL-MX200 Series
Out of Paper
User’s Guide
Off
Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Min
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out of
paper.
Middle*
Max
All Tones
Off
Disables all the alert tones.
Min
Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.
Middle*
Max
*
Factory default menu setting
mm / inch
Purpose:
To specify the measurement unit after the numeric value displayed on the operator panel.
Values:
Millimeters (mm)*
Inches (")
*
Factory default menu setting
2-Sided Report
Purpose:
To specify whether to print a report on either side of paper.
Values:
*
2-Sided
Prints a report on either side of paper.
1-Sided*
Prints a report on the single side of paper.
Factory default menu setting
Low Toner Alert Msg
Purpose:
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
296
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Values:
*
Off
Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.
On*
Shows the alert message when the toner is low.
Factory default menu setting
Power On Wizard
Purpose:
To perform initial settings for the printer.
See Also:
“Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel” on page 29
Values:
*
Yes
Performs the initial settings for the printer.
No*
Does not perform the initial settings for the printer.
Factory default menu setting
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to adjust print settings for each paper type, initialize the Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM), and change the toner cartridge settings.
F/W Version
Purpose:
To display the version of the controller.
Adjust BTR
Purpose:
To specify a voltage of the transfer roller (BTR) for optimum printing of each paper type. To lower the
voltage, specify a negative value. To increase, specify a positive value.
The default settings may not yield the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print
output, try increasing the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try decreasing the voltage.
Note:
The print quality depends on the values you select for this menu item.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
297
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Values:
Plain
0*
-3 - 3
Light Card
0*
-3 - 3
Labels
0*
-3 - 3
Recycled
0*
-3 - 3
Envelope
0*
-3 - 3
Postcard
0*
-3 - 3
*
Factory default menu setting
Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To specify a temperature of the fusing unit for optimum printing of each paper type. To lower the
temperature, specify a negative value. To increase, specify a positive value.
The default settings may not yield the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has
curled, try lowering the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try
increasing the temperature.
Note:
The print quality depends on the values you select for this menu item.
Values:
Plain
0*
-3 - 3
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
298
AL-MX200 Series
Light Card
User’s Guide
0*
-3 - 3
Labels
0*
-3 - 3
Recycled
0*
-3 - 3
Envelope
0*
-3 - 3
Postcard
0*
-3 - 3
*
Factory default menu setting
Density Adjustment
Purpose:
To adjust the print density level within the range of -3 to 3. The factory default menu setting is 0.
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Values:
*
Yes
Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.
No*
Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Factory default menu setting
Toner Refresh
Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a
new toner cartridge.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
299
AL-MX200 Series
Black
*
Yes
Cleans the toner in the toner cartridge.
No*
Does not clean the toner in the toner cartridge.
User’s Guide
Factory default menu setting
Machine life
Purpose:
To specify whether to continue print operations when the printer comes to the end of its service life.
Values:
*
Stop Print*
Stops print operations at the end of service life.
Continue Print
Continues print operations after the end of service life.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
❏ When the printer no longer operates showing the error code 191-310 on the LCD panel, operate as
follows to keep using the printer:
- if a job is remaining, press the
(Back) button and the
- if there is no job, select Continue Print in this menu.
button at the same time.
❏ Although you can keep using the printer after the end of its service life by changing the setting to
Continue Print, the printing quality is not guaranteed.
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize the NVM for the printer settings, the Phone Book data for fax, and the Address Book data
for scan. Enabling this feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the printer settings and all the
Phone Book (fax) and Address Book (scan) data to their factory default values.
See Also:
“Resetting to Factory Defaults” on page 325
Values:
User Fax Section
Yes
Initializes the Speed Dial and Group Dial entries in the Phone Book.
No*
Does not initialize the Speed Dial and Group Dial entries in the Phone
Book.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
300
AL-MX200 Series
User Scan Section
System Section
*
User’s Guide
Yes
Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
No*
Does not initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address
Book.
Yes
Initializes the printer settings.
No*
Does not initialize the printer settings.
Factory default menu setting
Non Genuine Toner
Purpose:
To use a toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Note:
❏ Using a non-genuine toner cartridge may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality
and decrease the reliability of your printer. We recommend you use only new Epson brand toner
cartridges for your printer. We do not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using
non-genuine consumables.
❏ Before you use a toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Values:
Toner
*
Off*
Does not use a toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
On
Uses a toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Factory default menu setting
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. You
can specify the altitude of the printer location for adjustment.
Note:
An incorrect altitude adjustment leads to poor printing quality and an incorrect indication of remaining
toner.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
301
AL-MX200 Series
0m*
User’s Guide
Select the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000m
2000m
3000m
*
Factory default menu setting
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the operator panel menus. This
prevents the printer settings from being changed accidentally.
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List with a password.
See Also:
“Panel Lock Feature” on page 322
Note:
You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Service Lock are set to
Unlocked and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.
Values:
Panel Lock Set
Change
Password*2
Disable*1
Does not restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List with a
password.
Enable
Restricts access to Admin Menu and Report / List with a password.
0000*1-9999
Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu and
Report / List.
*1 Factory default menu setting
*2 Not displayed when Panel
Lock Set is set to Disable.
Service Lock
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a password to use the services,
and to set or change the password.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
302
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
See Also:
“Limiting Access to Copy, Fax, Scan, and USB Direct Print Operations” on page 323
Note:
You can access to the items under Service Lock only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Values:
Copy
FAX
Scan
Print from USB
Change
Password*2
Unlocked*1
Enables the Copy function.
Locked
Disables the Copy function.
Password Locked
Enables the Copy function, but requires a password.
Unlocked*1
Enables the Fax function.
Locked
Disables the Fax function (the printer will not send or receive faxes).
Password Locked
Enables the Fax function, but requires a password to send faxes (does
not require a password to receive incoming faxes).
Unlocked*1
Enables the Scan function.
Locked
Disables the Scan function.
Password Locked
Enables the Scan function, but requires a password.
Unlocked*1
Enables the Print From USB Memory feature.
Locked
Disables the Print From USB Memory feature.
Password Locked
Enables the Print From USB Memory feature, but requires a password.
0000*1-9999
Sets or changes the password required to use the Copy, Fax, and Scan
functions and the Print From USB Memory feature.
*1 Factory default menu setting
*2 Displayed only when any of the Service
Lock items is set to Password Locked.
Secure Receive
Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes, and to set or change the password.
When Secure Receive Set is set to Enable, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them
when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.
Note:
You can access to the items under Secure Receive only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
303
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Values:
Secure Receive Set
Change
Password*2
Disable*1
Does not require a password to print incoming faxes.
Enable
Requires a password to print incoming faxes.
0000*1-9999
Sets or changes the password required to print incoming faxes.
*1 Factory default menu setting
*2 Not displayed when Secure
Receive Set is set to Disable.
Software Download
Purpose:
To install or discard the software data downloaded and sent by the connected computer.
Values:
*
Disable
Discards the downloaded software data to maximize data security.
Enable*
Installs the downloaded software data.
Factory default menu setting
Scan to E-Mail
Use the Scan to E-Mail menu to edit the transmission source.
Edit From Field
Purpose:
To enable or disable editing of the transmission source.
Values:
*
Disable
Disables editing of the transmission source.
Enable*
Enables editing of the transmission source.
Factory default menu setting
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
304
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Port Status
Purpose:
To enable or disable the USB interface.
Values:
*
Disable
Disables the USB interface.
Enable*
Enables the USB interface.
Factory default menu setting
PS Data Format
Purpose:
To set the PS data communications protocol. To make any changes effective, turn off the printer and
then turn it back on.
Values:
*
Auto*
Sets the PS data communications protocol automatically.
Standard
Sets the PS data communications protocol to Standard.
BCP
Sets the PS data communications protocol to BCP.
TBCP
Sets the PS data communications protocol to TBCP.
Factory default menu setting
Defaults Settings
Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy, scan, and fax settings of the printer.
Copy Defaults
Use the Copy Defaults menu to configure a variety of copy features.
Original Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
305
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
A4 - 210x297mm*
A5 - 148x210mm
B5 - 182x257mm
Letter - 8.5x11"
Folio - 8.5x13"
Legal - 8.5x14"
Executive
*
Factory default menu setting
Reduce/Enlarge
Purpose:
To specify the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Values:
mm system
200%
A5->A4(141%)
A5->B5(122%)
100%*
B5->A5(81%)
A4->A5(70%)
50%
*
Factory default menu setting
inch system
200%
Stmt->Lgl(154%)
Stmt->Ltr(129%)
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
306
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
100%*
Lgl->Ltr (78%)
Ldgr->Ltr(64%)
50%
*
Factory default menu setting
Note:
❏ You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press the
button to enlarge the zoom ratio or press the button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.
❏ This item is available only when Multiple Up is set to Off or Manual.
Collated
Purpose:
To specify whether to collate the copy job.
Values:
*
Off*
Does not copy documents in the collated order.
On
Copies documents in the collated order.
Factory default menu setting
Document Type
Purpose:
To specify the default document type.
Values:
*
Text
Suitable for documents with text.
Mixed*
Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.
Photo
Suitable for documents with photos.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
307
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Lighten/Darken
Purpose:
To specify the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighten2
Makes the copy lighter than the source document. Works well with dark print.
Lighten1
Normal*
Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents.
Darken1
Makes the copy darker than the source document. Works well with light print or
faint pencil markings.
Darken2
*
Factory default menu setting
Sharpness
Purpose:
To specify the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest
Makes the copy sharper than the source document.
Sharper
Normal*
Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Softer
Makes the copy softer than the source document.
Softest
*
Factory default menu setting
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off
Does not suppress the background.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
308
AL-MX200 Series
On*
*
User’s Guide
Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Factory default menu setting
Gray Balance
Purpose:
To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to 2. The factory default menu setting is
0.
2-Sided
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on either sides of paper.
Values:
*
1->1-Sided*
Makes regular single-sided copies.
Flip on Long Edge
Makes duplex (2-sided) copies ready to be bound on the long edge.
Flip on Short Edge
Makes duplex (2-sided) copies ready to be bound on the short edge.
Factory default menu setting
Multiple Up
Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
*
Off*
Makes regular one-to-one copies of the source documents.
Auto
Automatically reduces the size of the source documents to print all of them on a
single sheet of paper.
ID Card Copy
Prints both sides of the ID card on a single sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual
Reduces the size of the source documents according to the Reduce/Enlarge
setting and print all of them on a single sheet of paper.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
309
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Margin Top/Bottom
Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:
4mm*/0.2inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default menu
setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
Margin Left/Right
Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:
4mm*/0.2inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default menu
setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
Margin Middle
Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:
0mm*/0.0inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default menu
setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
Paper Error
Purpose:
To specify whether to display an error when the specified output paper size does not match the loaded
paper.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
310
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Important:
Printing repeatedly on the paper smaller than the specified output paper size may make the interior of
your printer dirty, which may result in poor print quality or breakdown in your printer.
Values:
*
Off*
Does not display an error when the specified output paper size does not match
the loaded paper.
On
Displays an error when the specified output paper size does not match the
loaded paper.
Factory default menu setting
Scan Defaults
Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scan features.
Scan to Network
Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer.
Values:
*
Computer(Network)*
Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.
Server(FTP)
Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
Factory default menu setting
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF*
MultiPageTIFF
TIFF
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
311
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
JPEG
*
Factory default menu setting
Color
Purpose:
To set the color mode.
Values:
*
Black & White
Scans in black and white mode. This is available only when File Format is set
to PDF or TIFF.
Grayscale
Scans in grayscale mode.
Color*
Scans in color mode.
Color(Photo)
Scans in color mode. This is suitable for photographic images.
Factory default menu setting
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the default scan resolution.
Values:
200 x 200dpi*
300 x 300dpi
400 x 400dpi
600 x 600dpi
*
Factory default menu setting
Document Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
312
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
A4 - 210x297mm*
A5 - 148x210mm
B5 - 182x257mm
Letter - 8.5x11"
Folio - 8.5x13"
Legal - 8.5x14"
Executive
*
Factory default menu setting
Lighten/Darken
Purpose:
To specify the default scan density level.
Values:
Lighten2
Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighten1
Normal*
Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents.
Darken1
Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print
or faint pencil markings.
Darken2
*
Factory default menu setting
Sharpness
Purpose:
To specify the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest
Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.
Sharper
Normal*
Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
313
AL-MX200 Series
Softer
User’s Guide
Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Softest
*
Factory default menu setting
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Values:
*
Off
Does not suppress the background.
On*
Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned
image.
Factory default menu setting
Margin Top/Bottom
Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:
2mm*/0.1inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default menu
setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under the
System Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
Margin Left/Right
Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:
2mm*/0.1inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default menu
setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under the
System Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
314
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Margin Middle
Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:
0mm*/0.0inch*
0 - 50mm/0.0 - 2.0inch
*
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch. Which factory default menu
setting displays depends on the value selected for mm / inch under the
System Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on page 296 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
TIFF File Format
Purpose:
To specify the TIFF file format.
Values:
TIFF V6*
TTN2
*
Factory default menu setting
Image Compression
Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Values:
*
Higher
Sets the higher image compression level.
Normal*
Sets the normal image compression level.
Lower
Sets the lower image compression level.
Factory default menu setting
Max E-Mail Size
Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50KB to 16384KB. The
default is 2048KB.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
315
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Fax Defaults
Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features.
Note:
The Fax service cannot be used unless you specify your region under Region. If Region is set to
Unknown, the message Set The Region Code appears on the LCD panel.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Values:
*
Standard*
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed with a dot-matrix printer.
SuperFine(203dpi)
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine details. The
SuperFine(203dpi) mode is effective only when the remote tax machine
supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.
SuperFine(406dpi)
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
Faxes scanned in the SuperFine(203dpi) mode are received at the highest resolution of the remote
machine.
Document Type
Purpose:
To specify the default document type.
Values:
*
Text*
Suitable for documents with text.
Photo
Suitable for documents with photos.
Factory default menu setting
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
316
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Lighten/Darken
Purpose:
To specify the default fax density level.
Values:
Lighten2
Makes the fax lighter than the source document. Works well with dark print.
Lighten1
Normal*
Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents.
Darken1
Makes the fax darker than the source document. Works well with light print or
faint pencil markings.
Darken2
*
Factory default menu setting
Delayed Start
Purpose:
This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to start. Once Delayed Start
mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them
at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is
cleared.
Values:
21:00*/PM 9:00*
0:00 - 23:59 / AM/PM 1:00 - 12:59
*
Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
Which factory default menu setting displays depends on the value set for Time
Format under the System Settings menu. See “Changing the Clock Mode”
on page 224 for more information.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.
Print from USB Defaults
Use the Print from USB Defaults menus to configure the Print From USB Memory feature.
2-Sided
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on either side of paper.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
317
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Values:
*
1->1-Sided*
Prints on a single side of paper.
Flip on Long Edge
Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the long edge.
Flip on Short Edge
Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the short edge.
Factory default menu setting
Layout
Purpose:
To specify the output layout.
Values:
1UP*
2UP
4UP
*
Factory default menu setting
AutoFit
Purpose:
To automatically enlarge/reduce the size of the image to fit it into the paper selected for printing.
Values:
*
Auto*
Reduces/enlarges the size of the image to fit it into the paper before printing.
Off
Prints the image as it is.
Factory default menu setting
Note:
This item is available only when a TIFF or JPG file is selected for printing.
PDF Password
Purpose:
To specify a password for printing secure PDF files.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
318
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Values:
********************************
Enter a password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters for printing secure PDF
files.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings option to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the paper tray.
Paper Tray
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the paper tray.
Values:
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
319
AL-MX200 Series
Paper Size
User’s Guide
A4 - 210x297mm*
A5 - 148x210mm
B5 - 182x257mm
Letter - 8.5x11"
Folio - 8.5x13"
Legal - 8.5x14"
Executive
Statement
#10 Env. - 4.125x9.5"
Monarch Env.
Monarch Env. L
DL Env. - 110x220mm
DL Env. L
C5 Env. - 162x229mm
Postcard JPN - 148x100mm
W-Postcard JPN - 148x200mm
Env Yougata 2
Env Yougata 2L
Env Yougata 3
Env Yougata 3L
Env Yougata 4
Env Yougata 6
Env Younaga 3
Env Nagagata 3
Env Nagagata 4
Env Kakugata 3
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
320
AL-MX200 Series
New Custom
Size
Portrait(Y)
297mm*/11.7inch*
127mm - 355mm/
5.0inch - 14.0inch
Landscape(X)
210mm*/8.3inch*
77mm - 215mm/
3.0inch - 8.5inch
Paper Type
User’s Guide
Specifies the length of the custom size
paper. Which factory default menu set‐
ting displays depends on the value se‐
lected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on
page 296 for more information.
Specifies the width of the custom size
paper. Which factory default menu set‐
ting displays depends on the value se‐
lected for mm / inch under the System
Settings menu. See “mm / inch” on
page 296 for more information.
Plain*
Light Card
Labels
Recycled
Envelope
Postcard
*
Factory default menu setting
Note:
For details on the supported paper sizes, see “Usable Print Media” on page 119.
Panel Language
Purpose:
To specify the language to be used on the operator panel.
See Also:
“Changing the Language” on page 326
Values:
English*
English
Français
French
Italiano
Italian
Deutsch
German
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
321
AL-MX200 Series
Español
Spanish
Nederlands
Dutch
Português Europeu
Portuguese
Türkçe
Turkish
User’s Guide
Russian
Traditional Chinese
Korean
*
Factory default menu setting
Panel Lock Feature
This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing the settings on the operator panel made by
the administrator. However, you can modify the settings for individual print jobs using the print
driver.
Enabling the Panel Lock Feature
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Secure Settings, and then press the
4. Select Panel Lock, and then press the
button.
5. Select Panel Lock Set, and then press the
6. Select Enable, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
7. If necessary, select Change Password, and then press the
8. Enter a new password, and then press the
button.
button.
Note:
The factory-default panel password is 0000.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
322
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
❏ Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password.
However, the settings for the Address Book are cleared.
1. Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the System button, turn on the printer.
❏ If you want to change the password while Panel Lock Set is Enable, perform steps 1 and 2. Enter
button. Perform steps 3 and 4. Select Change
the current password, and then press the
Password, and then press the
button. Enter a new password, and then press the button. This
will change the password.
Disabling the Panel Lock Feature
Note:
You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Service Lock are set to
Unlocked and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Enter the password, and then press the
button.
4. Select Secure Settings, and then press the
5. Select Panel Lock, and then press the
button.
6. Select Panel Lock Set, and then press the
7. Select Disable, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
Note:
The password is reset to 0000 when the setting for Panel Lock Set is changed from Enable to
Disable.
Limiting Access to Copy, Fax, Scan, and USB Direct Print Operations
Enabling the Copy, FAX, Scan, and Print from USB lock options limits access to copy, fax, scan, and
USB direct print operations.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
323
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Taking the Copy lock option as an example, the following procedure explains how to enable or disable
the option. Use the same procedure to enable or disable the FAX, Scan, and Print from USB lock
options.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Secure Settings, and then press the
4. Select Panel Lock, and then press the
button.
5. Select Panel Lock Set, and then press the
6. Select Enable, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
7. If necessary, select Change Password, and change the password using the numeric keypad. Then,
press the
button.
Note:
The factory-default panel password is 0000.
8. Press the
(Back) button.
9. Select Service Lock, and then press the
10. Select Copy, and then press the
button.
button.
11. Select one of the following options, and then press the
button.
❏ Unlocked
❏ Locked
❏ Password Locked
Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings
The printer enters a power saver mode after the specified time period of inactivity. You can set Power
Saver Timer to place the printer in either of the power saver modes.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
324
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select System Settings, and then press the
button.
4. Select Power Saver Timer, and then press the
button.
5. Select Low Power Timer, or Sleep Timer, and then press the
button.
6. Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
You can select from 1 - 30 minutes for Low Power Timer or 6 - 11 minutes for Sleep Timer.
Resetting to Factory Defaults
Enabling the Initialize NVM feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the printer settings and the
Phone Book (fax) and Address Book (scan) data to their factory default menu settings.
Note:
The following procedure does not initialize the network settings.
❏ To initialize the wired network settings, see “Initialize NVM” on page 281.
❏ To initialize the wireless network settings on the AL-MX200DWF model, see “Reset Wireless (ALMX200DWF only)” on page 279.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Maintenance, and then press the
4. Select Initialize NVM, and then press the
button.
button.
5. Select System Section to initialize the printer settings, and then press the
button.
Select User Fax Section to initialize the Phone Book data for fax.
Select User Scan Section to initialize the Address Book data for scan.
6. Select Yes, and then press the
button.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
325
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The printer restarts automatically with the factory default menu settings.
Changing the Language
To display a different language on the operator panel:
Using the Operator Panel
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Panel Language, and then press the
button.
3. Select the desired language, and then press the
button.
Using the Printer Setting Utility
®
®
The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 as an example.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step, when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility appears.
2. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3. Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The System Settings page is displayed.
4. Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then click the Apply New Settings
button.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
326
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Using the Numeric Keypad
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter numbers and names. For example, when you
enter the password, you enter four-digit number. When you set up your printer, you enter your name
or your company name.
Entering Characters
When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the
LCD panel.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.
❏ Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, m, n, o, M, N, O and finally 6.
❏ To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.
❏ Press the
button when you are finished.
Key
Assigned numbers, letters or characters
1
1 @ . _ - (space) \ & ( ) ! " # $ % ' ~ ^ | ` ; : ? , + * / = [ ] { } < >
2
abcABC2
3
defDEF3
4
ghiGHI4
5
jklJKL5
6
mnoMNO6
7
pqrsPQRS7
8
tuvTUV8
9
wxyzWXYZ9
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
327
AL-MX200 Series
Key
Assigned numbers, letters or characters
0
0
*
-_~
#
(space) & ( )
User’s Guide
Changing Numbers or Names
If an incorrect number or name is entered, press the C (Clear) button to clear the number or character.
Then enter the correct number or character.
Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad
328
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams.
! Warning:
If you cannot remove the paper jam by doing the procedures in the manual, do not try to forcibly
remove the jam. Doing so may cause injuries. Contact your local Epson representative.
See Also:
❏ “About Print Media” on page 115
❏ “Supported Print Media” on page 119
Note:
Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
Avoiding Jams
❏ Use only recommended print media.
❏ See “Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123 and “Loading Print Media in the Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132 to load print media properly.
❏ Do not load print media before turning on the printer.
❏ Do not overload the print media sources.
❏ Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
❏ Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try
feeding one sheet at a time through the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).
❏ Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.
❏ Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
❏ Ensure that the recommended print surface is face up when you load print media in the paper tray
or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).
Troubleshooting
329
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment.
❏ Do not remove the paper tray cover while printing is in progress.
❏ Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.
❏ Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
See Also:
❏ “About Print Media” on page 115
❏ “Supported Print Media” on page 119
❏ “Print Media Storage Guidelines” on page 119
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
! Caution:
Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped
around the fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the
product immediately and contact your local Epson representative.
Important:
Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.
Troubleshooting
330
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.
1
Center Output Tray
2
Rear Cover
3
OPC Drum
4
Levers
5
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
6
Front Cover
7
Paper Tray
8
ADF Cover
Troubleshooting
331
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
When a document is jammed while it passes through the ADF, follow the steps below to remove it.
Note:
To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the
following illustration.
3. If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder tray.
Troubleshooting
332
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.
5. Close the document feeder tray.
6. Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.
Note:
Be sure to adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-size document.
Troubleshooting
333
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
7. If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any
jammed document there, open the document cover.
8. Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by carefully pulling the document
in the direction of the arrow shown in the following illustration.
Troubleshooting
334
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer
Clearing Paper Jams From the Paper Tray
Important:
❏ To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
❏ To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes
extremely hot during use.
❏ Protect the OPC drum against bright light. If the rear cover is left open for more than five minutes,
print quality may deteriorate.
Note:
To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover.
2. Lift up the levers.
Troubleshooting
335
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Pull the paper tray out of the printer carefully. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front slightly,
and remove it from the printer.
4. Remove all the jammed and/or creased paper from the tray.
5. Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it.
Troubleshooting
336
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
6. Lower the levers to the original position.
7. Close the rear cover.
8. Insert the paper tray into the printer, and push until it clicks into place.
Troubleshooting
337
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Clearing Paper Jams From the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Important:
❏ Do not put excessive force on the front cover when removing the jammed paper. Doing so could
damage the cover.
❏ To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
❏ To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes
extremely hot during use.
❏ Protect the OPC drum against bright light. If the rear cover is left open for more than five minutes,
print quality may deteriorate.
Note:
To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover.
2. Lift up the levers.
Troubleshooting
338
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it.
4. Lower the levers to the original position.
5. Close the rear cover.
Troubleshooting
339
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer
Important:
❏ To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
❏ To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes
extremely hot during use.
❏ Protect the OPC drum against bright light. If the rear cover is left open for more than five minutes,
print quality may deteriorate.
Note:
To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover.
2. Lift up the levers.
Troubleshooting
340
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Remove the jammed paper from the rear of the printer.
4. Lower the levers to the original position.
5. Close the rear cover.
If the error is not resolved, there may be a piece of paper remaining inside the printer. Use the
following procedure to clear the jam.
6. Load print media in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) if there is no print media.
Troubleshooting
341
AL-MX200 Series
7. Press the
User’s Guide
(Clear All) button on the operator panel for three seconds.
The print media is fed to push out the jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Center Output Tray
Important:
❏ To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
❏ To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes
extremely hot during use.
❏ Protect the OPC drum against bright light. If the rear cover is left open for more than five minutes,
print quality may deteriorate.
Note:
To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover.
Troubleshooting
342
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
2. Lift up the levers.
3. Remove the jammed paper from the rear of the printer.
4. If no paper is found in the paper path, lift and open the scanner unit.
Troubleshooting
343
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. Remove any paper jammed out of the center output tray.
6. Lower and close the scanner unit.
7. Lower the levers to the original position.
Troubleshooting
344
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
8. Close the rear cover.
If the error is not resolved, there may be a piece of paper remaining inside the printer. Use the
following procedure to clear the jam.
9. Load print media in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) if there is no print media.
10. Press the
(Clear All) button on the operator panel for 3 seconds.
The print media is fed to push out the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
345
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Jam Problems
Misfeed Jam
Problem
Action
Print media misfeeds occur.
Remove the paper from the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), and then ensure that the
paper is properly inserted in the paper tray.
Depending on the print media you use, take any of the following actions:
❏
For thick paper, use the one that is 163 gsm or less.
❏
For postcard, the one up to 190 gsm is available.
❏
For thin paper, use the one that is 60 gsm or more.
❏
For the envelope, ensure that it is properly loaded in the paper tray as
instructed in “Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray” on page 128.
If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.
If performing manual duplex (2-sided) printing, ensure that the print media is not
curled.
Fan the print media.
If the print media is damp, turn over the print media.
If the problem continues, use print media that is not damp.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Multi-feed Jam
Problem
Action
Print media multiple feeds occur.
Remove the paper from the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), and then ensure that the
paper is properly loaded in the paper tray.
If the print media is damp, use print media that is not damp.
Fan the print media.
A document jam occurs in the ADF if
scanning of multiple-sheet document
is cancelled while scanning is in
progress.
Clear the jam.
See Also:
“Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 332
Troubleshooting
346
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the
following:
❏ The power cord is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
❏ The printer is turned on.
❏ The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
❏ Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
❏ When the AL-MX200DWF model is connected to a wireless network, an Ethernet cable should be
unplugged from the printer.
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds,
and then turn on the printer. This often fixes the problem.
Display Problems
Problem
Action
After the printer is turned on, the
display on the LCD panel is blank, keeps
showing Please Wait..., or the back
light is not lit.
Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on the printer. Self Test Message
appears on the LCD panel. When the test is completed, Select Function is
displayed.
Menu settings changed from the
operator panel have no effect.
Settings in the software program, the print driver, or the printer utilities have
precedence over the settings made on the operator panel.
Change the menu settings from the print driver, the printer utilities, or the software
program instead of the operator panel.
Troubleshooting
347
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Printing Problems
Problem
Action
Job did not print or incorrect characters
printed.
Ensure that the Select Function screen appears on the LCD panel before you
send a job to print.
Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.
Verify that you are using the correct print driver.
Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cable and that it is securely
connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
Check the interface of your printer from Admin Menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print the System Settings page to verify
that the current interface settings are correct. Refer to “Printing the System Settings
Page” on page 156 for details on how to print the System Settings page.
Troubleshooting
348
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds
occur.
Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.
See Also:
“Usable Print Media” on page 119
Fan the print media before loading it.
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the paper width guides and length guide are adjusted correctly.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) or the paper tray when
you load it. Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Load print media with the recommended print surface facing in the correct
direction.
See Also:
“Loading Print Media” on page 122
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding
improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix print media sizes.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.
The envelope is creased after printing.
Ensure that the envelope is loaded in the paper tray as instructed in “Loading
Envelopes in the Paper Tray” on page 128.
Page breaks in unexpected places.
Increase the value for Job Time-Out in the System Settings menu, that is on the
Printer Maintenance tab in the Printer Setting Utility.
Increase the time-out value in the Protocol Settings menu on EpsonNet Config.
Print media does not stack neatly in the
center output tray.
Turn the print media stack over in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) and the paper
tray.
Printer does not duplex pages.
Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the
Paper/Output tab of the print driver.
Troubleshooting
349
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Print Quality Problems
Note:
In this section, some procedures use the Printer Setting Utility or Status Monitor. Some procedures that
use the Printer Setting Utility can also be performed using the operator panel.
See Also:
❏ “Understanding the Operator Panel Menus” on page 264
❏ “Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only)” on page 34
❏ “Status Monitor (Windows Only)” on page 35
The Output Is Too Light
Troubleshooting
350
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
The output is too light.
The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of
toner in the toner cartridge.
1. Check the toner level on the Consumables tab of the Printer Status window of
Status Monitor.
2. Replace the toner cartridge as needed.
Verify that the print media is dry and the correct print media is used.
If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
See Also:
“Usable Print Media” on page 119
Try changing the Paper Type setting on the print driver.
1. On the Paper/Output tab for Printing Preferences of the print driver, change
the Paper Type setting.
Disable Toner Saving Mode on the print driver.
1. On the Graphics tab in Printing Preferences of the print driver, ensure that the
Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Toner Smears or Print Comes Off/Stain on Back Side
Troubleshooting
351
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
Toner smears or print comes off.
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type setting in the
print driver. For example, change Plain to Lightweight Cardstock.
The output has stain on the back side.
1. On the Paper/Output tab for Printing Preferences of the print driver, change
the Paper Type setting.
Verify that the correct print media is being used.
If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
See Also:
“Usable Print Media” on page 119
Adjust the temperature of the fusing unit.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
2. Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your printing media.
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Random Spots/Blurred Images
Troubleshooting
352
AL-MX200 Series
Problem
Action
The printed result has random spots or
is blurred.
Ensure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly.
User’s Guide
See Also:
“Installing a Toner Cartridge” on page 387
If you use a non-genuine brand toner cartridge, install a genuine brand toner
cartridge.
Clean up the fusing unit.
1. Load one sheet of paper in the paper tray, and then print a solid image all over
paper.
2. Load the printed sheet with the print surface facing down, and then print a blank
sheet of paper.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
The Entire Output Is Blank
If this trouble happens, contact our local representative office or authorized dealer.
Streaks Appear on the Output
Troubleshooting
353
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
If this trouble happens, contact our local representative office or authorized dealer.
Mottle
Problem
Action
The printed result has mottled
appearance.
Adjust the transfer bias.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, click Adjust BTR on the Printer Maintenance
tab.
2. Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used.
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media recommended for
the printer.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Ghosting
Troubleshooting
354
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
The printed result has ghosting.
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type setting in the
print driver. For example, change Plain to Lightweight Cardstock.
1. On the Paper/Output tab for Printing Preferences of the print driver, change
the Paper Type setting.
Adjust the transfer bias.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, click Adjust BTR on the Printer Maintenance
tab.
2. Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used.
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Adjust the temperature of the fusing unit.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
2. Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your printing media.
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media recommended for
the printer.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Fog
Troubleshooting
355
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
The printed result is foggy.
When the whole is printed light, contact our local representative office or
authorized dealer.
When the printed page is partly light, start Clean Developer.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis
tab.
2. Click the Start button.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
Problem
Action
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) is happening.
If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of the location.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, and click Adjust Altitude on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
2. Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Troubleshooting
356
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Auger Mark
Problem
Action
The printed result has auger mark.
The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of
toner in the toner cartridge.
1. Check the toner level on the Consumables tab of the Printer Status window of
Status Monitor.
2. Replace the toner cartridge as needed.
Start Clean Developer.
1. Launch the Printer Setting Utility, and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis
tab.
2. Click the Start button.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Wrinkled/Stained Paper
Troubleshooting
357
AL-MX200 Series
Problem
Action
The output is wrinkled.
Verify that the correct print media is being used.
The output is stained.
If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
User’s Guide
If excessive folds or wrinkles occur, load print media from a new package and use
the paper tray cover.
See Also:
❏
“Usable Print Media” on page 119
❏
“About Print Media” on page 115
If you use the envelope, check whether the crease is within 30 mm of the four edges
of the envelope.
If the crease is within 30 mm of the four edges of the envelope, this is considered
normal. Your printer is not at fault.
If not, check if the printer supports your envelope type, and then check if you
loaded the envelope in the correct orientation. For more information, see “Loading
Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123 or “Loading Print Media in the Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
The Top Margin Is Incorrect
Problem
Action
The top margin is incorrect.
Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Troubleshooting
358
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Protrudent/Bumpy Paper
Problem
Action
Printed surface got protrudent/bumpy.
Clean up the fusing unit.
1. Load one sheet of paper in the paper tray, and then print a solid image all over
paper.
2. Load the printed sheet with the print surface facing down, and then print a blank
sheet of paper.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Copy Problem
Problem
Action
A document loaded in the ADF cannot
be copied.
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Troubleshooting
359
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Copy Quality Problems
Problem
Action
There are lines or streaks in copies
made from the ADF.
There is debris on the ADF glass. When scanning, the paper from the ADF passes
over the debris creating lines or streaks.
Clean the ADF glass with a lint free cloth.
See Also:
“Cleaning the Scanner” on page 380
There are spots in copies taken from the
document glass.
There is debris on the document glass. When scanning, the debris creates a spot on
the image.
Clean the document glass with a lint free cloth.
See Also:
“Cleaning the Scanner” on page 380
The reverse side of the original is
showing on the copy.
On the Copy menu, enable Auto Exposure.
Light colors are washed out or white on
the copy.
On the Copy menu, disable Auto Exposure.
Image is too light or dark.
Use the Lighten/Darken option on the Copy menu.
For information on turning Auto Exposure on and off, see “Auto Exposure” on
page 175.
For information on turning Auto Exposure on and off, see “Auto Exposure” on
page 175.
For information on making the image lighter or darker, see “Lighten/Darken” on
page 173.
Note:
If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
Troubleshooting
360
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Fax Problems
Problem
Action
The printer is not working, there is no
display and the buttons are not
working.
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
No dial tone sounds.
Check that the phone line is connected properly.
Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in the memory do
not dial correctly.
Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly. Print the Address Book
List.
The document does not feed into the
printer.
Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly. Check
that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically.
Select FAX Mode for Ans Select.
Ensure that there is paper in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) or the paper tray.
Check if the LCD panel shows Memory Full.
Check the Junk Fax Filter setting.
When the Junk Fax Filter is set to On, you can receive faxes from the fax
numbers registered in the Address Book of the printer. Faxes sent from other
numbers are rejected.
The printer does not send faxes.
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is
received in poor-quality.
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty. Ask the sender to sort out the
problem and resend the fax.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Check your printer by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge.
See Also:
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 383
Some of the words on an incoming fax
are stretched.
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam. Ask the
sender to clear the document jam and resend the fax.
Troubleshooting
361
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
There are lines on the documents you
send.
Check your ADF glass for marks and clean it.
The printer dials a number, but the
connection with another fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming
calls. Ask the sender to sort out the problem and retry.
Documents are not stored in the
memory.
There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the LCD panel shows
Memory Full, delete any documents you no longer need from the memory and
then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax transmission or
reception) to complete.
Blank areas appear at the bottom of
each page or on other pages, with a
small strip of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Correct
the paper settings.
The printer will not send or receive
faxes.
Ensure that the region is set correctly.
See Also:
“Cleaning the Scanner” on page 380
See Also:
“Tray Settings” on page 319
1. Press the System button.
button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
button.
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
4. Select Region, and then press the
button.
5. When the setting is correct, press the
screen.
(Back) button to return to the previous
To change the setting, select the correct region and then press the
Yes to reboot the printer.
button. Select
Check that the phone line is connected properly.
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
An error often occurs during a fax
transmission or reception.
Reduce the modem speed.
1. Press the System button.
2. Select Admin Menu, and then press the
3. Select Fax Settings, and then press the
4. Select Modem Speed, and then press the
button.
button.
button.
5. Select the desired menu item, and then press the
button.
Troubleshooting
362
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Scanning Problems
Problem
Action
The scanner does not work.
Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down on the document
glass, or face up in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to
scan. Try the Preview feature to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution
rate.
Check that the USB cable is connected properly.
Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a known good
cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to
use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
The printer scans very slowly.
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E-Mail or Scan
to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of
memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low
resolution.
Document misfeeds or multiple feeds
occur in the ADF.
Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the printer.
See Also:
❏
“Preparing a Document” on page 162
❏
“Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 165
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF.
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity
of the ADF.
Ensure that the document is not curled.
Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.
Vertical stripes appear on the output
when scanned using the ADF.
Clean the ADF glass.
See Also:
“Cleaning the Scanner” on page 380
Troubleshooting
363
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Problem
Action
A smear appears at the same location
on the output when scanned using the
document glass.
Clean the document glass.
Images are skewed.
Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass.
Diagonal lines appear jagged when
scanned using the ADF.
If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.
The printer does not properly transfer
scan data to a specified destination via
the Scan to E-Mail or Scan to Network
feature.
Check if the following settings have been set correctly on EpsonNet Config.
See Also:
“Cleaning the Scanner” on page 380
Scan to E-Mail
Check the following setting under Address Book — Personal Address:
❏
Address
Scan to Network
Check the following settings under Address Book — Computer/Server Address
Book:
Cannot scan using WIA on a Windows
Server 2003 computer.
®
❏
Name (Displayed on Printer)
❏
Network Type
❏
Host Address (IP Address or DNS Name)
❏
Port Number
❏
Login Name (if required by host)
❏
Login Password
❏
Name of Shared Directory
❏
Subdirectory Path (optional)
Enable WIA on the computer.
To enable WIA:
1. Click Start — Administrative Tools — Services.
2. Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and then click Properties to
ensure that Startup type is set to Manual or Automatic.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and then click Start.
Troubleshooting
364
AL-MX200 Series
Problem
Action
Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2008 or Windows
Server 2008 R2 computer.
Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.
User’s Guide
To install Desktop Experience:
1. Click Start — Administrative Tools — Server Manager.
2. Under Features Summary, click Add Features.
3. Select the Desktop Experience check box.
4. If a window appears, follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Click Next, and then click Install.
6. Restart the computer.
Scan Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Problem
Action
Unable to retrieve the Address Book
data from the printer on the Address
Book Editor.
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB
cable or Ethernet cable.
Ensure that the printer is turned on.
Ensure that the print driver is installed on your computer. (The Address Book Editor
retrieves the Address Book data via the print driver.)
The TWAIN driver cannot connect to
the printer.
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB
cable.
Check whether the printer is turned on. If the printer is turned on, reboot it by
turning the power switch off and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.
The scan driver has not been registered
on your computer and cannot be
accessed from the Express Scan
Manager.
Install the scan driver. If the driver is already installed, uninstall it and then reinstall
it.
Failed to scan your document on the
printer via the Express Scan Manager.
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB
cable.
Check whether the printer is turned on. If the printer is turned on, reboot it by
turning the power switch off and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.
Troubleshooting
365
AL-MX200 Series
Problem
Action
Failed to create an image file via the
Express Scan Manager.
Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk.
User’s Guide
Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
Failed to initialize the Express Scan
Manager.
Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
Failed to execute the Express Scan
Manager.
Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
An unexpected error occurred on the
Express Scan Manager.
Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
Other Problems
Problem
Action
Condensation has occurred inside the
printer.
This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter. This also
occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity reaches
85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate
environment.
Understanding Printer Messages
The printer’s LCD panel displays a message describing the current state of the printer or indicates a
possible printer problem you must resolve. This section describes error codes included in the
messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.
Important:
When an error message is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer and the information
accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured.
Error Code
What You Can Do
005-121
Open the ADF cover. Remove the jammed paper and then close the ADF cover.
See Also:
“Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on page 332
005-301
Close the ADF cover.
Troubleshooting
366
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
010-397
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
016-315
016-317
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
016-372
016-501
016-502
016-503
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the SMTP server setting is correct by contacting your
server administrator.
016-504
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the user name and password for the POP3 server are set
correctly by contacting your server administrator.
016-506
Press the
correctly.
016-507
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the user name and password used for the SMTP server
are set correctly by contacting your server administrator.
016-718
Press the
button to clear the message. Retry when the printer does not process any job.
016-719
Press the
button to cancel the current job. Retry when the printer does not process any job.
button to clear the message. Check if the SMTP server address and e-mail destination are set
016-720
016-744
016-745
Press the button to clear the message. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
016-749
Press the
button to cancel the current job. Retry when the printer does not process any job.
016-753
Press the
button to cancel the current job. Retry when the printer does not process any job.
016-755
016-764
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the Ethernet cable is properly connected. If this does
not solve the problem, contact SMTP server administrator.
016-766
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the server or the computer is available by pinging the IP
address. If this does not solve the problem, contact your server administrator.
016-767
Press the
016-791
Insert the USB memory device and press the
button to clear the message. Check if the recipient address is correct, and try scanning again.
button to clear the message.
Troubleshooting
367
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
016-795
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the format of a file stored in USB memory device is
supported, or the file is not broken.
016-797
button to clear the message. Check the wireless settings for the access point and the printer.
016-920
Press the
016-930
Remove the device from the front USB port and press the
button to clear the message.
016-931
016-981
Press the
016-985
Attached file size is larger than you defined. Press the
017-970
017-980
button to cancel the current job. Try copying fewer documents.
❏
Enlarge Max E-Mail Size.
❏
Lower the resolution setting.
❏
Change the file format of the scanned image.
Memory is likely to be full. Press the
button to clear the message. Try the following:
❏
Delete the data stored in the memory.
❏
Lower the resolution setting.
❏
Reduce the number of pages.
Press the
button to clear the message. Try the following:
button to clear the message. Retry when the printer does not process any job.
017-981
017-988
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the interface cable is securely connected or your
computer does not have any problem.
018-338
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
024-340
024-360
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
024-371
024-958
024-963
Load the specified paper and press the
one appears.
button to clear the message. Follow the on-screen instruction if
See Also:
❏
“Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏
“Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
Troubleshooting
368
AL-MX200 Series
Error Code
What You Can Do
024-969
Load the specified paper and press the
User’s Guide
button to clear the message.
See Also:
❏
“Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏
“Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
026-720
Press the
026-721
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the USB memory device is write-protected or gets any
disk problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the USB memory device has enough memory.
026-722
button to clear the message. Check if the path and file name to save the data is too long.
026-723
Press the
026-750
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the interface cable is securely connected, or restart the
application you use.
026-751
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the interface cable is securely connected.
026-752
027-446
IPv6 address duplication. Change the IP address setting.
027-452
IPv4 address duplication. Change the IP address setting.
031-521
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the access setting to the SMB server is correct by
contacting your server administrator.
031-526
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the domain name of the SMB server is correct. Check
DNS connection, or check if the name of the forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-529
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the network is properly connected and if the password
for the SMB server is correct.
031-530
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the working path setting to the SMB server is correct.
031-533
Press the
button to clear the message. Check the following:
❏
If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
❏
If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
❏
If the SMB server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.
Press the
problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the SMB server encounters any write-protection or disk
031-537
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-555
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the network is properly connected.
031-534
031-535
031-536
Troubleshooting
369
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
031-556
Press the
problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the SMB server encounters any write-protection or disk
031-557
Press the
button to clear the message. Check the following:
❏
If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
❏
If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-558
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the access setting to the SMB server is correct by
contacting your server administrator.
031-571
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the network is properly connected.
031-574
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the domain name of the FTP server is correct.
031-575
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the host name setting to the FTP server is correct.
031-576
Press the
problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk
031-578
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the network is properly connected and if login name
(user name) and password for the FTP server are correct.
031-579
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the working path setting to the FTP server is correct.
031-582
Press the
problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk
031-584
Press the
button to clear the message. Check the following:
031-585
❏
If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
❏
If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
❏
If the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the FTP server encounters any delete/write-protection
or disk problem.
031-587
031-588
Press the
problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk
031-589
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-594
Press the button to clear the message. Contact your server administrator to check if the scanned file
has wrong setting while being stored to FTP server. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local
representative office or authorized dealer.
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
031-598
Press the
problem.
button to clear the message. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk
Troubleshooting
370
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
033-503
Press the button to clear the message. Retry, and check the report. Delete the unnecessary data stored
in the memory.
033-513
033-517
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the password of the fax lock is correct.
033-518
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if your region is set correctly.
033-519
Fax service is locked. To continue, press the
button and disable the fax lock.
See Also:
“Limiting Access to Copy, Fax, Scan, and USB Direct Print Operations” on page 323
button to clear the message. The job is cancelled.
033-787
Press the
033-788
Press the button to clear the message. Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is
completed.
034-700
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
034-701
034-702
❏
Check if the phone line is connected properly.
❏
Check if the destination number is correct.
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
034-703
034-704
034-705
034-706
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
❏
Check if the phone line is connected properly.
❏
Check if the destination number is available and correct.
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
034-707
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
❏
Lower Modem Speed.
Troubleshooting
371
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
034-708
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
034-709
034-710
034-711
034-712
034-713
034-714
034-715
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
❏
Lower Modem Speed.
❏
Check if the destination number is available.
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
❏
Lower Modem Speed.
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
❏
Check if the destination number is available.
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified
number of times, try the following:
❏
Set Number of Redial to the largest value.
❏
Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer.
❏
Lower Modem Speed.
034-716
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified
number of times, it will be cancelled. When retrying sending the fax, lower Modem Speed.
034-717
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified
number of times, it will be cancelled. Retry sending the fax.
034-718
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified
number of times, it will be cancelled. When retrying sending the fax, lower Modem Speed.
034-719
034-720
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified
number of times, it will be cancelled. When retrying sending the fax, try the following:
❏
Lower Modem Speed.
❏
Enable ECM.
Troubleshooting
372
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
034-721
Press the button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified
number of times, it will be cancelled. When retrying sending the fax, lower Modem Speed.
034-722
034-723
034-724
034-725
034-726
034-727
Press the button to clear the message. Check if the destination number is available. If the error
continues to appear after the retry for the specified number of times, it will be cancelled.
034-750
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly.
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
034-751
Press the button to clear the message. Check the Junk Fax Filter setting. When the Junk Fax
Filter is set to On, register the fax number of sender in the Address Book of the printer, or set the Junk
Fax Filter to Off.
034-752
Press the
034-753
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
034-754
Press the
button to clear the message. Lower Modem Speed.
Press the
Speed.
button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly. Or, lower Modem
button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly.
034-755
034-756
034-757
034-758
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
034-759
Press the
button to clear the message. Lower Modem Speed.
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly.
034-760
034-761
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
Troubleshooting
373
AL-MX200 Series
Error Code
What You Can Do
034-762
Press the
034-763
User’s Guide
button to clear the message. Try the following:
❏
Lower Modem Speed.
❏
Enable ECM.
Press the
button to clear the message. Lower Modem Speed.
Press the
button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly.
034-764
034-765
034-766
034-767
See Also:
“Connecting the Telephone Line” on page 221
button to clear the message. Lower Modem Speed.
034-768
Press the
041-340
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
042-358
061-370
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
062-321
075-100
Check and clear the paper path, load the paper, and then press the
button to clear the message.
See Also:
“Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer” on page 335
075-921
Load the printed output in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) and press the
077-100
Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper.
077-104
See Also:
“Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer” on page 340
button.
077-106
077-108
077-109
077-304
Close the rear cover.
077-900
Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper.
077-901
See Also:
“Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer” on page 340
077-907
Troubleshooting
374
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
091-402
The service life of your printer is coming to an end and the printer will soon stop running. If you want to
keep using the printer, change the Machine life setting to Continue Print. However, continuous use
of the printer will degrade the print quality.
See Also:
“Machine life” on page 300
091-441
The printer has exceeded its service life or the settings have been changed to continue using it. The
quality of printouts will degrade if the printer continues to be used.
See Also:
“Machine life” on page 300
092-651
092-661
093-426
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
Replace the toner cartridge soon.
See Also:
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 383
093-925
Set the toner cartridge appropriately or replace it.
See Also:
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 383
093-926
Replace the toner cartridge with a supported one.
See Also:
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 383
093-933
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. If you do not replace the toner cartridge, print quality
problems may occur.
See Also:
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 383
093-974
Turn off the printer, check if the toner cartridge is installed correctly, and then turn on the printer. If this
does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office or authorized dealer.
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
Troubleshooting
375
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
116-210
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
116-314
116-323
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
116-325
116-326
116-355
116-395
116-703
Press the
button to cancel the current job. Retry when the printer does not process any job.
116-720
117-331
117-332
117-333
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
117-334
117-342
117-346
117-348
Retry, and check the report. Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact
our local representative office or authorized dealer.
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
117-350
Open the rear cover and then close it.
117-366
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact our local representative office
or authorized dealer.
124-333
134-211
See Also:
“Contacting Epson Support” on page 397
Troubleshooting
376
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Error Code
What You Can Do
191-310
Although the service life of your printer has been over and the printer stopped running, you can still use
the printer by performing as follows:
(Back) button and the button at the same time.
- if a job is remaining, press the
- if there is no job, press the System button, and then select Continue Print in Machine Life of
Maintenance.
However, continuous use of the printer will degrade the print quality.
See Also:
“Machine life” on page 300
193-700
A non-genuine toner is installed.
Note:
As for the following message, which does not include an error code, refer to the table below for the
solution.
Error Message
What You Can Do
Wrong Paper Size
Load the specified paper and press the
Reload Paper then
See Also:
Press OK
❏
“Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray” on page 123
❏
“Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)” on page 132
button to clear the message.
Job Cancelled
Open the ADF cover. Remove the jammed paper and then close the ADF cover.
Open ADF Cover
See Also:
“Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)” on
page 332
and Remove All Paper
Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the
error message on the LCD panel.
You need to know the model of your printer and serial number. See the label on the rear cover of your
printer.
Getting Help
We provide several automatic diagnostic tools to help you produce and maintain print quality.
Troubleshooting
377
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
LCD Panel Messages
The LCD panel provides you with information and troubleshooting help. When an error or warning
condition occurs, the LCD panel displays a message informing you of the problem.
See Also:
“Understanding Printer Messages” on page 366
Status Monitor Alerts
Status Monitor is a tool that is included on the Software Disc. It automatically checks the printer status
when you send a print job. If the printer is unable to print your job, Status Monitor automatically
displays an alert on your computer screen to let you know that the printer needs attention.
Enabling the Non Genuine Toner Mode
When toner within the toner cartridge is empty, the message, 093-933, appears.
When you want to use the printer in the Non Genuine Toner mode, enable the Non Genuine Toner
mode and replace the toner cartridge.
Important:
If you use the printer in the Non Genuine Toner mode, the performance of the printer may not be at its
optimum. And any problems that may arise from the use of the Non Genuine Toner mode are not
covered by our quality guarantee. The continuous use of the Non Genuine Toner mode can also cause the
printer to break down, and any repair charges for such break down will be incurred by users.
Note:
To disable the Non Genuine Toner mode, select Off for Toner of Non Genuine Toner on the operator
panel or clear the check box next to On on the Non Genuine Toner page of the Printer Maintenance tab
of the Printer Setting Utility.
Using the Operator Panel
Note:
Before starting the operation described below, confirm that the LCD panel shows Select Function.
1. Press the System button.
Troubleshooting
378
AL-MX200 Series
2. Select Admin Menu and then press the
button.
3. Select Maintenance and then press the
button.
4. Select Non Genuine Toner and then press the
5. Select Toner and then press the
6. Select On and then press the
7. Press the
User’s Guide
button.
button.
button.
button until the top page is displayed.
The printer switches to the Non Genuine Toner mode.
Using the Printer Setting Utility (Windows Only)
®
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Printer Setting Utility.
Note:
The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your
computer. In this case, click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name.
The Printer Setting Utility starts.
2. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3. Select Non Genuine Toner from the list at the left side of the page.
The Non Genuine Toner page is displayed.
4. Select the check box next to On, and then click the Apply New Settings button.
Troubleshooting
379
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Chapter 11
Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
This section describes how to clean the printer in order to maintain it in good condition and print
clean printouts all the time.
! Warning:
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning
materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners to avoid
catching fire and explosion.
! Caution:
When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may
cause electric shock.
Cleaning the Scanner
To ensure the best possible copies, clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the day, as
needed, to keep it clean.
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the document cover.
Maintenance
380
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until they are clean and dry.
1
Film
2
White Document Cover
3
Document Glass
4
ADF Glass
4. Wipe the underside of the white document cover and film until they are clean and dry.
Maintenance
381
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
5. Close the document cover.
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller
To ensure the best possible copies, clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals to keep it clean.
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.
Maintenance
382
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
The ADF feed roller soiled with ink stains may dirty the paper that goes through the Automatic
Document Feeder (ADF). In such a case, slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with
neutral detergent or water, and wipe the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Genuine toner cartridges are available only through Epson.
It is recommended that you use a genuine toner cartridge for your printer. Epson does not provide
warranty coverage for problems caused by using non-genuine consumables.
! Warning:
❏ Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills.
It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a
large volume of toner, contact your local Epson representative.
❏ Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch
fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Epson representative for
its disposal.
Maintenance
383
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
! Caution:
❏ Keep drum cartridges (or drum if not a cartridge type) and toner cartridges out of the reach of
children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water
and consult a physician immediately.
❏ When replacing drum cartridges (or drum if not a cartridge type) and toner cartridges, be
careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes
and mouth as well as inhalation.
❏ If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes
until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult
a physician immediately.
Important:
Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of the toner.
When to Replace the Toner Cartridge
The printer has one toner cartridge: black (K).
When a toner cartridge reaches its usable life-span, the following messages appear on the LCD panel.
*
Message
Remaining Page Yield
Printer Status and Action
093-426*
Approx. 500 pages
The toner cartridge has become low. Prepare a new
one.
093-933
—
The toner cartridge has become empty. Replace the
old toner cartridge with a new one.
This warning appears only when a genuine toner cartridge is used (i.e. Non Genuine Toner is disabled).
Important:
❏ When placing a used toner cartridge on the floor or on a table, place a few sheets of paper under the
toner cartridge to catch any toner that may spill.
❏ Do not reuse old toner cartridges that you remove from the printer. Doing so can impair print
quality.
❏ Do not shake or pound used toner cartridges. The remaining toner may spill.
❏ We recommend you use up a toner cartridge within one year after you remove it from the packaging.
Maintenance
384
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Removing the Toner Cartridge
1. Open the front cover.
2. Open the toner access cover.
3. Spread a few sheets of paper on the floor or table where you want to place the removed toner
cartridge.
Maintenance
385
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Turn the toner cartridge counterclockwise to unlock.
5. Pull the toner cartridge out.
Important:
❏ Do not touch the shutter of the used toner cartridge.
❏ Always pull the toner cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.
6. Place the toner cartridge slowly on the sheets of paper you spread in step 4.
Maintenance
386
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Installing a Toner Cartridge
1. Unpack a new toner cartridge and shake it five times to distribute the toner evenly.
Note:
Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spilling of the toner.
2. Insert the toner cartridge into the cartridge holder, and then turn it clockwise to align to the lock
mark.
Important:
Be sure to secure the toner cartridge firmly before printing. Otherwise, it may cause some defects.
Maintenance
387
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
3. Close the toner access cover. Make sure that the cover clicks into place.
4. Close the front cover.
5. Pack the removed toner cartridge in the box in which the installed toner cartridge was packed
up.
6. Taking care not to touch any spilled toner, dispose of the sheets of paper you used for toner
cartridge replacement.
Ordering Supplies
The toner cartridge needs to be ordered occasionally. The toner cartridge includes installation
instructions on the box.
Maintenance
388
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Consumables
Important:
Use only consumables we recommend. Use of any consumables other than recommended can impair
machine quality and performance.
Product Name
Product Code
TONER CARTRIDGE
0709
DOUBLE TONER CARTRIDGE PACK
0710
RETURN DOUBLE TONER CARTRIDGE PACK
0711
Important:
The number of printable pages are applicable when A4 plain paper SEF ( ) is used and printing is done
continuously in the print ratio of 5% in image density. Also, it satisfies the public values on the basis of JIS
X6931 (ISO/IEC 19752). These values are estimates and vary depending on conditions such as the
content being printed, paper size, paper type, the printer’s operating environment, initializing process
done when you turn on or off the printer, and adjustments to maintain print quality.
Note:
❏ The printable number of pages for the starter toner cartridge shipped with the printer is
approximately 1,000 pages.
❏ Each toner cartridge includes installation instructions on the box.
When to Order a Toner Cartridge
The LCD panel displays a warning when the toner cartridge nears its replacement time. Verify that
you have a replacement at hand. It is important to order a toner cartridge when the message first
appears to avoid interruptions to your printing. The LCD panel displays an error message when the
toner cartridge must be replaced.
To order a toner cartridge, contact our local representative office or authorized dealer.
Important:
This printer is designed to provide the most stable performance and print quality when used with the
recommended toner cartridge. Not using the toner cartridge recommended for this printer degrades the
performance and printing quality of the printer. You could also incur charges if the printer breaks down.
To receive customer support and achieve the optimum performance of the printer, be sure to use the
recommended toner cartridge.
Maintenance
389
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Recycling Supplies
❏ For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Epson reuses returned toner
cartridges and drums (photoreceptors) to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy
recovery.
❏ Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges no longer needed. Do not open toner cartridges.
Return them to your local Epson representative.
Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables
in:
❏ Temperatures greater than 40 ˚C (140 ˚F).
❏ An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
❏ Direct sunlight.
❏ Dusty places.
❏ A car for a long period of time.
❏ An environment where corrosive gases are present.
❏ An environment with salty air.
Managing the Printer
Checking or Managing the Printer with EpsonNet Config
When the printer is installed in a TCP/IP environment, you can check printer status and configure
settings using a web browser on a network computer. You can also use EpsonNet Config to check the
remaining volume of consumables and the paper loaded in this printer.
Note:
When using the printer as a local printer, you cannot use EpsonNet Config. For details on checking the
status of a local printer, refer to “Checking Printer Status with Status Monitor (Windows Only)” on
page 391.
Maintenance
390
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Starting EpsonNet Config
Use the following procedure to start EpsonNet Config.
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and then press the Enter key.
EpsonNet Config appears on your browser.
Using Online Help
For details regarding the items that you can set on EpsonNet Config, click the Help button to display
the online Help.
Checking Printer Status with Status Monitor (Windows Only)
Status Monitor is a tool that is installed along with your print driver. It automatically checks the
printer status when you send a print job. Status Monitor can also check the status of the paper tray and
remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
Starting Status Monitor
Double-click the Status Monitor icon on the taskbar or right-click the icon and select Printer
Selection.
If the Status Monitor icon is not displayed on the taskbar, open Status Monitor from the Start menu.
®
®
The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 as an example.
1. Click Start — All Programs — EPSON — your printer — Activate Status Monitor.
The Printer Selection window appears.
2. Click the name of the desired printer from the list.
The Printer Status window appears.
For details on the functions of Status Monitor, refer to the Help of Status Monitor.
See Also:
“Status Monitor (Windows Only)” on page 35
Maintenance
391
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Checking Printer Status Through E-mail
When connected in a network environment where e-mail exchange is available, the printer can send
an e-mail report to specified e-mail addresses containing the following information:
❏ The error status which has occurred on the printer
Setting the E-mail Environment
Access EpsonNet Config. On the Properties tab, configure the following settings according to your
e-mail environment. After configuring the settings on each window, always click Apply and then turn
off/on the printer to reboot. For details on each item, refer to the Help on EpsonNet Config.
Item
Item to be configured
Description
General Setup —
StatusMessenger
Recipient's E-mail Address
Specify up to two e-mail addresses to which notices about
changes in printer status or errors are sent.
Notification Items
Set the content of the notices to send via e‐mail.
Port Status
StatusMessenger
Select Enabled.
Protocol Settings —
E-mail
SMTP Server Settings
Select appropriate settings for sending and receiving
e-mails.
❏
Machine's E-mail
Address
❏
SMTP Server Address
❏
SMTP Server Port
Number
Send Authentication
❏
E-mail Send
Authentication
❏
Login Name
❏
Password
❏
Re-enter Password
POP3 Server Settings
❏
POP3 Server Address
❏
POP3 Server Port
Number
❏
Login Name
❏
Password
❏
Re-enter Password
Maintenance
392
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings of your print driver to conserve toner and paper.
Supply
Setting
Function
Toner cartridge
Toner Saving Mode in the
Graphics tab of the print
driver
This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses
less toner. When this feature is used, the image quality will be
lower than when it is not used.
Print media
Multiple Up in the Layout
tab of the print driver
The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet.
The available numbers that each print driver can print on one
sheet of paper are as follows:
❏
Windows
❏
Mac OS X Print Driver: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages
® Print Driver: 2, 4, 8, or 16 pages
Combined with the Duplex (2-sided) print setting, Multiple Up
allows you to print up to 32 pages on one sheet of paper. (16
images on the front and 16 on the back)
Checking Page Counts
You can print the System Settings page to check the total number of printed pages. The total number of
printed pages is shown in the Print Volume section, classified by paper sizes.
Single side print (including Multiple Up print) is counted as one job, and 2-sided print (including
Multiple Up print) is counted as two. During duplex (2-sided) printing, if an error occurs after one
side is printed properly, it is counted as one.
During duplex (2-sided) printing, a blank page may be inserted automatically depending on the
settings of the application. In this case, the blank page is counted as one page. If a blank page is inserted
during duplex (2-sided) printing for odd-number pages and the rear of the last odd-number page is
left blank, however, this page is excluded from page counting.
Note:
Refer to “Printing the System Settings Page” on page 156 for details on how to print the System Settings
page.
Maintenance
393
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Moving the Printer
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Disconnect the power cord, interface cable, and any other cables.
3. Remove all paper from the document output tray.
Maintenance
394
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
4. Lift the scanner unit, remove all paper from the center output tray, and then retract the output tray
extension, if extended.
5. Remove the paper tray from the printer.
6. Lift the printer and move it gently.
Maintenance
395
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Note:
If you move the printer over a long distance, be sure to remove the toner cartridge and pack the
printer inside a box to avoid spilling of the toner.
7. Place the printer at a new location and replace the paper tray.
Maintenance
396
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Appendix A
Where To Get Help
Contacting Epson Support
Before Contacting Epson
If your Epson product is not operating properly and you cannot solve the problem using the
troubleshooting information in your product documentation, contact Epson support services for
assistance. If Epson support for your area is not listed below, contact the dealer where you purchased
your product.
Epson support will be able to help you much more quickly if you give them the following information:
❏ Product serial number
(The serial number label is usually on the back of the product.)
❏ Product model
❏ Product software version
(Click About, Version Info, or similar button in the product software.)
❏ Brand and model of your computer
❏ Your computer operating system name and version
❏ Names and versions of the software applications you normally use with your product
Help for Users in Europe
Check your Pan-European Warranty Document for information on how to contact Epson support.
Help for Users in Taiwan
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
Where To Get Help
397
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
World Wide Web (http://www.epson.com.tw)
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, and products enquiry are available.
Epson HelpDesk (Phone: +0280242008)
Our HelpDesk team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Repair service center:
Telephone number
Fax number
Address
02-23416969
02-23417070
No.20, Beiping E. Rd., Zhongzheng Dist., Taipei City 100,
Taiwan
02-27491234
02-27495955
1F., No.16, Sec. 5, Nanjing E. Rd., Songshan Dist., Taipei City
105, Taiwan
02-32340688
02-32340699
No.1, Ln. 359, Sec. 2, Zhongshan Rd., Zhonghe City, Taipei
County 235, Taiwan
039-605007
039-600969
No.342-1, Guangrong Rd., Luodong Township, Yilan
County 265, Taiwan
038-312966
038-312977
No.87, Guolian 2nd Rd., Hualien City, Hualien County 970,
Taiwan
03-4393119
03-4396589
5F., No.2, Nandong Rd., Pingzhen City, Taoyuan County
32455, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
03-5325077
03-5320092
1F., No.9, Ln. 379, Sec. 1, Jingguo Rd., North Dist., Hsinchu
City 300, Taiwan
04-23011502
04-23011503
3F., No.30, Dahe Rd., West Dist., Taichung City 40341,
Taiwan (R.O.C.)
04-23805000
04-23806000
No.530, Sec. 4, Henan Rd., Nantun Dist., Taichung City 408,
Taiwan
05-2784222
05-2784555
No.463, Zhongxiao Rd., East Dist., Chiayi City 600, Taiwan
06-2221666
06-2112555
No.141, Gongyuan N. Rd., North Dist., Tainan City 704,
Taiwan
Where To Get Help
398
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Telephone number
Fax number
Address
07-5520918
07-5540926
1F., No.337, Minghua Rd., Gushan Dist., Kaohsiung City
804, Taiwan
07-3222445
07-3218085
No.51, Shandong St., Sanmin Dist., Kaohsiung City 807,
Taiwan
08-7344771
08-7344802
1F., No.113, Shengli Rd., Pingtung City, Pingtung County
900, Taiwan
Help for Users in Singapore
Sources of information, support, and services available from Epson Singapore are:
World Wide Web (http://www.epson.com.sg)
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ),
Sales Enquiries, and Technical Support via e-mail are available.
Epson HelpDesk (Phone: (65) 6586 3111)
Our HelpDesk team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Help for Users in Thailand
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web (http://www.epson.co.th)
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ),
and e-mail are available.
Epson Hotline (Phone: (66)2685-9899)
Our Hotline team can help you with the following over the phone:
Where To Get Help
399
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Help for Users in Vietnam
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
Epson Hotline (Phone):
84-8-823-9239
Service Center:
80 Truong Dinh Street, District 1, Hochiminh City
Vietnam
Help for Users in Indonesia
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web (http://www.epson.co.id)
❏ Information on product specifications, drivers for download
❏ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries, questions through e-mail
Epson Hotline
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Technical support
Phone
(62) 21-572 4350
Fax
(62) 21-572 4357
Where To Get Help
400
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Epson Service Center
Jakarta
Mangga Dua Mall 3rd floor No 3A/B
Jl. Arteri Mangga Dua,
Jakarta
Phone/Fax: (62) 21-62301104
Bandung
Lippo Center 8th floor
Jl. Gatot Subroto No.2
Bandung
Phone/Fax: (62) 22-7303766
Surabaya
Hitech Mall lt IIB No. 12
Jl. Kusuma Bangsa 116 – 118
Surabaya
Phone: (62) 31-5355035
Fax: (62)31-5477837
Yogyakarta
Hotel Natour Garuda
Jl. Malioboro No. 60
Yogyakarta
Phone: (62) 274-565478
Medan
Wisma HSBC 4th floor
Jl. Diponegoro No. 11
Medan
Phone/Fax: (62) 61-4516173
Makassar
MTC Karebosi Lt. Ill Kav. P7-8
JI. Ahmad Yani No.49
Makassar
Phone: (62)411-350147/411-350148
Where To Get Help
401
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Help for Users in Hong Kong
To obtain technical support as well as other after-sales services, users are welcome to contact Epson
Hong Kong Limited.
Internet Home Page
Epson Hong Kong has established a local home page in both Chinese and English on the Internet to
provide users with the following information:
❏ Product information
❏ Answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
❏ Latest versions of Epson product drivers
Users can access our World Wide Web home page at:
http://www.epson.com.hk
Technical Support Hotline
You can also contact our technical staff at the following telephone and fax numbers:
Phone:
(852) 2827-8911
Fax:
(852) 2827-4383
Help for Users in Malaysia
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web (http://www.epson.com.my)
❏ Information on product specifications, drivers for download
❏ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries, questions through e-mail
Epson Trading (M) Sdn. Bhd.
Head Office.
Where To Get Help
402
AL-MX200 Series
Phone:
603-56288288
Fax:
603-56288388/399
User’s Guide
Epson Helpdesk
❏ Sales enquiries and product information (Infoline)
Phone:
603-56288222
❏ Enquiries on repair services & warranty, product usage and technical support (Techline)
Phone:
603-56288333
Help for Users in the Philippines
To obtain technical support as well as other after sales services, users are welcome to contact the Epson
Philippines Corporation at the telephone and fax numbers and e-mail address below:
Trunk Line:
(63-2) 706 2609
Fax:
(63-2) 706 2665
Helpdesk Direct Line:
(63-2) 706 2625
E-mail:
epchelpdesk@epc.epson.com.ph
World Wide Web (http://www.epson.com.ph)
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ),
and E-mail Enquiries are available.
Toll-Free No. 1800-1069-EPSON(37766)
Our Hotline team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
Where To Get Help
403
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Where To Get Help
404
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Index
#
C
# button.................................................................................29
C (Clear) button..................................................................29
Canceling a print job.........................................................140
From computer..............................................................140
From operator panel......................................................140
Center output tray.............................................26, 331 , 342
CentreWare Internet Services
Managing printer...........................................................390
Online help for...............................................................391
Starting............................................................................391
Clean Developer................................................................299
Clear All button...................................................................29
Clearing jams.....................................................................329
Clearing paper jams
From Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)...............332
From center output tray................................................342
From front of printer.....................................................335
From paper tray.............................................................335
From Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)..............................338
From rear of printer......................................................340
Clock mode........................................................................224
Clock Settings....................................................................294
Coding method....................................................................24
Collated......................................................................171, 307
Color...................................................................................312
Company Name........................................................260, 286
Connecting printer..............................................................39
Connection specifications..................................................40
Connection type..................................................................40
Connectivity.........................................................................22
Conserving supplies..........................................................393
Consumables......................................................................389
Contacting Epson..............................................................397
Contacting service.............................................................377
Continuous copy.................................................................19
Continuous copy speed......................................................19
Continuous print speed......................................................20
Copy
ID card.............................................................................181
Limiting access...............................................................323
Copy button/LED................................................................28
2
2-Sided............................................176, 268 , 274 , 309 , 317
2-Sided Print..............................................................260, 288
2-Sided Report...................................................................296
A
Address Book.....................................................................265
Address Book button..........................................................29
Address Book Editor...........................................................37
ADF cover.............................................................27, 28 , 331
ADF glass......................................................................28, 381
Adjust Altitude..................................................................301
Adjust BTR.........................................................................297
Adjust Fusing Unit............................................................298
Admin Menu......................................................................265
Alert Tone..........................................................................295
Ans Select...................................................................259, 282
Ans/FAX Mode..................................................................259
Applicable lines....................................................................24
Auto Ans. Ans/FAX..................................................259, 283
Auto Ans. TEL/FAX.................................................259, 283
Auto Answer Fax.......................................................259, 283
Auto Exposure..................................................175, 308 , 314
Auto Reset..........................................................................293
AutoFit................................................................................318
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).........................26, 27
Automatic duplex printing..............................................141
Automatic redialing..........................................................232
Avoiding jams....................................................................329
B
Back button..........................................................................29
Basic printer problems......................................................347
Index
405
AL-MX200 Series
Copy problem....................................................................359
Copy quality
Problems.........................................................................360
Custom paper.....................................................................153
With Mac OS X driver..................................................155
With Windows print driver.........................................154
Customizing copy options...............................................166
D
Data LED..............................................................................29
Delayed Start......................................................................317
Density Adjustment..........................................................299
Dialing Type..............................................................259, 284
Dimensions..........................................................................20
Direct Fax...........................................................................233
Discard Size................................................................260, 290
Display problems...............................................................347
Document cover..................................................................28
Document feeder tray...................................................26, 28
Document glass...........................................................28, 381
Document guides.................................................................28
Document output tray........................................................26
Document Size...................................................................312
Document size.....................................................................24
Document stopper...............................................................26
Document Type......................................172, 228 , 307 , 316
Draft Mode.........................................................................272
DRPD Mode.......................................................................259
DRPD Pattern............................................................260, 287
Duplex printing.................................................................141
E
ECM............................................................................261, 290
Edit From Field..................................................................304
Energy Saver button/LED..................................................29
Envelope.....................................................................298, 299
EpsonNet Config.................................................................33
Error and warning messages............................................378
Error History......................................................................265
Error LED.............................................................................29
Ethernet..............................................................................276
Ethernet port..................................................................27, 40
Express Scan Manager........................................................37
User’s Guide
Extel Hook Thresh....................................................261, 290
F
F/W Version.......................................................................297
Fault Time-Out..................................................................293
Fax
Limiting access...............................................................323
Fax Activity.......................................................261, 265 , 291
Fax Broadcast.............................................................261, 292
Fax button/LED...................................................................29
Fax Cover Page..........................................................260, 286
Fax Fwd E-Mail.........................................................260, 289
Fax Fwd Number......................................................260, 289
FAX Mode..........................................................................259
Fax Number.......................................................................260
Fax problems......................................................................361
Fax Transmit......................................................................261
File Format.........................................................................311
Film.....................................................................................381
First Copy Output Time.....................................................19
Font.....................................................................................268
Font Pitch...........................................................................271
Font Size.............................................................................270
Form Line...........................................................................271
Forward Settings.......................................................260, 289
Front cover...................................................................26, 331
G
Getting help........................................................................377
Status Monitor Alerts....................................................378
Gray Balance......................................................................309
Group Dial..........................................................................266
Group dialing.....................................................................247
H
Halftone................................................................................18
HDD......................................................................................18
Help
Epson...............................................................................397
Index
406
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Image Compression..........................................................315
Image Enhance..................................................................272
Initialize NVM...........................................................281, 300
Installing print driver
Linux................................................................................104
Mac OS X..........................................................................99
Windows...........................................................................49
InternetServices.................................................................281
Interval Timer............................................................259, 285
IP Filter...............................................................................281
Maintenance.......................................................................297
Manual duplex printing....................................................142
Margin Left/Right............................................179, 310 , 314
Margin Middle.................................................180, 310 , 315
Margin Top/Bottom........................................178, 310 , 314
Max E-Mail Size.................................................................315
Memory................................................................................18
Meter Readings..................................................................265
mm / inch...........................................................................296
Modem Speed............................................................261, 291
Mottle..................................................................................354
Multiple Up......................................................176, 309 , 393
J
N
Job History.........................................................................264
Job Status button/LED........................................................28
Job Time-Out.....................................................................294
Junk Fax Filter...........................................................260, 285
Network..............................................................................275
Network connection setup.................................................53
Non Genuine Toner.................................................301, 378
Number of copies..............................................................166
Number of fax lines.............................................................24
Number of Redial......................................................260, 285
Numeric keypad..................................................................28
I
L
Labels..........................................................................298, 299
Launcher...............................................................................36
Layout.........................................................................275, 318
LCD panel.............................................................................29
LCD panel messages.........................................................378
Levers....................................................................................27
Light Card..................................................................298, 299
Lighten/Darken.............................173, 228 , 308 , 313 , 317
Line Monitor..............................................................259, 283
Line Termination..............................................................272
Line Type....................................................................259, 284
Loading envelopes in the paper tray.......................128, 135
Loading print media.........................................................122
Paper tray........................................................................123
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).........................................132
Low Toner Alert Msg........................................................296
LPD......................................................................................280
O
OK button.............................................................................29
One-touch buttons..............................................................28
OPC drum....................................................................27, 331
Operating system...........................................................21, 25
Operator panel...............................................................26, 28
Ordering supplies..............................................................389
Orientation.........................................................................268
Original paper size........................................................18, 22
Original Size...............................................................167, 305
Output Paper Size..............................................................168
Output paper size................................................................18
Output paper weight...........................................................19
Output tray capacity............................................................19
Output tray extension.................................................26, 137
M
P
Machine life........................................................................300
Machine weight...................................................................20
Main components...............................................................26
Panel Language..................................................................321
Panel Lock..................................................................302, 322
Panel Settings.....................................................................264
Index
407
AL-MX200 Series
Panel Settings page..............................................................30
Paper chute...........................................................................27
Paper Error.........................................................................310
Paper jam location.............................................................330
Center output tray.........................................................331
Front cover......................................................................331
Levers...............................................................................331
OPC drum.......................................................................331
Paper tray........................................................................331
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).........................................331
Rear cover.......................................................................331
Paper jams...............................................335, 340 , 342 , 346
Paper tray........................................................................335
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).........................................338
Paper Size...................................................................266, 275
Paper Tray..........................................................................319
Paper tray............................................................26, 120 , 331
Paper tray capacity..............................................................19
Paper tray cover...................................................................26
Paper width guides......................................................26, 126
Parts name............................................................................26
PCL Fonts List...................................................................265
PCL print driver...................................................................49
PCL Settings.......................................................................266
PDF Password............................................................275, 318
PDF Settings.......................................................................273
PDL........................................................................................21
Peer-to-peer..........................................................................93
Phone Book........................................................................266
Phone connector...........................................................27, 40
Plain.....................................................................................298
Point and Print....................................................................89
Port 9100.............................................................................280
Port Status..........................................................................305
Post Card....................................................................298, 299
Power connector..................................................................27
Power consumption............................................................20
Power On Wizard..............................................................297
Power saver mode.............................................................324
Power Saver Timer............................................................292
Power supply........................................................................19
Power switch........................................................................26
Prefix Dial.........................................................260, 261 , 289
Prefix Dial Num........................................................260, 290
Print button/LED................................................................29
User’s Guide
Print driver
Linux................................................................................104
Mac OS X..........................................................................99
PCL....................................................................................49
Windows...........................................................................49
Print driver pre-install status.............................................50
Print media.........................................................................393
Dimensions.....................................................................123
Print Mode.........................................................................274
Print quality problems......................................................350
Print resolution....................................................................21
Printer
Managing........................................................................390
Messages..........................................................................366
Moving............................................................................394
Status...............................................................................392
Printer messages................................................................366
Printer Setting Utility..........................................................34
Printer software...................................................................33
Printer status......................................................................392
Printing...............................................................................139
Basics...............................................................................115
Custom paper.................................................................153
From computer..............................................................139
Problems.........................................................................348
With Web Services on Devices....................................159
Printing problems.............................................................348
Printing resolution..............................................................18
Printing with Web Services on Devices.........................159
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)....................26, 121 , 331 , 338
Problems
contacting Epson...........................................................397
solving.............................................................................397
Product features...................................................................13
Protocol........................................................................21, 280
Protocol Monitor...............................................................265
PS Data Format.........................................................282, 305
PS Error Report.................................................................273
PS Fonts List.......................................................................265
PS Job Time-Out...............................................................273
PS Settings..........................................................................273
Q
Quantity......................................................................271, 274
Index
408
AL-MX200 Series
R
Rear cover.....................................................................27, 331
Rear cover handle................................................................27
Recording paper size...........................................................23
Recycled......................................................................298, 299
Recycling supplies.............................................................390
Redial Delay...............................................................260, 285
Redial/Pause button............................................................29
Reduce/Enlarge.........................................................169, 306
Reduction/enlargement......................................................19
Region.........................................................................261, 292
Registration roller................................................................27
Remote Rcv Tone......................................................260, 286
Remote Receive.........................................................260, 285
Report page........................................................................156
Reset Wireless....................................................................279
Resetting to factory defaults.............................................325
Resolution.........................................................227, 312 , 316
Setting scan resolution..................................................218
Ring Tone Volume....................................................259, 284
Ringer volume....................................................................257
S
Scan button/LED.................................................................28
Scan settings
Color mode.....................................................................217
Document size................................................................218
Scan resolution...............................................................218
Scanned image file type.................................................217
Suppress background color..........................................219
Scan to e-mail.......................................................................23
Scan to Network................................................................311
Scan to PC.............................................................................23
Scanner driver/printer utility problems.........................365
Scanning
Limiting access...............................................................323
Scanning halftone................................................................22
Scanning problems............................................................363
Scanning resolution...............................................18, 22 , 24
Secure Receive....................................................................303
Secure Settings...................................................................302
Send document size.............................................................23
Send Header...............................................................260, 286
User’s Guide
Sending a fax......................................................................225
Sending a fax from memory............................................229
Sending a fax manually.....................................................230
Service.................................................................................397
Service Lock........................................................................302
Setting the printer ID........................................................223
Setting the time and date..................................................224
Setting your region............................................................222
Sharpness..........................................................174, 308 , 313
SNMP..................................................................................280
Software Download...........................................................304
Software installation............................................................39
Space requirement...............................................................20
Speaker volume..................................................................257
Specifications.......................................................................18
Speed Dial...........................................................................266
Speed Dial button................................................................29
Start button...........................................................................29
Status Monitor Alerts........................................................378
StatusMessenger........................................................280, 392
Configuring....................................................................392
Stop button...........................................................................29
Storing consumables.........................................................390
Supplies
Recycling.........................................................................390
When to order................................................................389
Symbol Set..........................................................................270
System button/LED.............................................................28
System Settings..........................................................264, 292
T
TCP/IP................................................................................279
TEL Mode...........................................................................259
TEL/FAX Mode.................................................................259
TIFF File Format...............................................................315
Toner access cover...............................................................26
Toner cartridge............................................................26, 384
Conserving......................................................................393
Install...............................................................................387
Remove............................................................................385
When to order................................................................389
When to replace.............................................................384
Toner Refresh....................................................................299
Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN)............184
Index
409
AL-MX200 Series
User’s Guide
Total page counts..............................................................393
Transfer roller......................................................................27
Transmission mode.............................................................24
Transmission resolution.....................................................24
Transmission speed.............................................................24
Transmission time...............................................................24
Tray Settings......................................................................319
U
Usage environment.............................................................20
USB direct print
Limiting access...............................................................323
USB port..................................................................26, 27 , 40
USB Settings.......................................................................304
USB storage device............................................................211
W
Wall jack connector.............................................27, 40 , 221
White document cover.....................................................381
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)..............................186
Wireless network settings...................................................54
Wireless Setup....................................................................277
Wireless Status...................................................................276
WPS Setup..........................................................................279
Y
Your Fax Number.............................................................286
Index
410
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising